JP2019126504A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve game amusement by heightening a performance effect of a light emission performance.SOLUTION: In a pachinko game machine, a performance control CPU can execute a light emission performance by a first specific pattern for emitting light from LED by a light emission mode in which a specific color such as blue, green or red is flashed, and by a second specific pattern for emitting light from the LED by a light emission mode in which some color in a plurality of colors including the specific color is changed to another color. Further, a jackpot reliability is different, and an emission period of the specific color is also different, in the first specific pattern and in the second specific pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 74

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is one that has been configured. Furthermore, a variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variation") identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display means is a specific display result. Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine).

  The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or to give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball to the prize area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  Among the gaming machines as described above, there is known a game machine capable of executing a strobe emission effect and having a higher jackpot reliability as the emission period of the strobe is longer (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-147835 A

  In the gaming machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, it is possible to enhance the game interest by the light emission effect, but simply in the case where the light emission period becomes long according to the reliability of the big hit, the effect effect is not good. There was a problem that it was enough.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to propose a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effects of light emission effects and improving the game interest.

  The present invention takes the following means in order to solve the above problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later and the drawings are added for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to those with the reference numerals.

The invention according to means 1
It is a game machine (pachinko game machine 1 etc.) provided with a light emitting part (LED 9: left frame LED 9b, sky frame LED 9a, right frame LED 9c, feature LED, board LED, light guide plate, segment display, dot display, etc.) And
It further comprises a light emission effect means (effect control board 12: effect control CPU 120 etc.) capable of executing a light emission effect using the light emission unit,
The light emission effecting means is a first specific pattern (light emission pattern table 1211 of FIG. 72: category: LP11 to LP13: FIG. 72) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode in which specific colors (monochrome: blue, green, red, etc.) are blinked. Light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, and the like) and a second specification that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode in which any one of a plurality of colors including the specific color is changed to another color. The light emission effect can be executed by a pattern (light emission pattern table 1211 of FIG. 72: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1 etc.),
Expectations (big hit reliability etc.) for the player are different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern, and light emitting cycles of the specific color are different (FIG. 74: switching unit light emitting time Δtn is a blinking unit) Emission time Δto1 to Δto3 etc.),
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, by making the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern different in the expectation for the player and by making the light emission period of the specific color different, the effect effect of the light emission effect is enhanced, and the game entertainment is enhanced. It can be improved.

The invention according to means 2 is
It is a game machine (pachinko game machine 1 etc.) provided with a light emitting part (LED 9: left frame LED 9b, sky frame LED 9a, right frame LED 9c, feature LED, board LED, light guide plate, segment display, dot display, etc.) And
It further comprises a light emission effect means (effect control board 12: effect control CPU 120 etc.) capable of executing a light emission effect using the light emission unit,
The light emission effect means is a first pattern (light emission pattern table 1211: category: LP1 to LP3: light emission pattern LP1-1 in FIG. 62) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a specific color (monochrome: blue, green, red, etc.). LP1-2, LP2-1, LP2-2, LP3-1, LP3-2, etc.) and a second pattern for causing the light emitting section to emit light in a plurality of colors (blue, green, red → rainbow, etc.) (FIG. 62). The light emission effect can be executed by the light emission pattern table 1211: category LP4: light emission pattern LP4-1, LP4-2 etc.) (light emission effect process etc. in FIG. 71),
The first pattern and the second pattern differ in the degree of expectation (big hit reliability etc.) for the player and in the presentation period (light emission pattern table 1211 in FIG. 62: light emission presentation time, FIG. 61, FIG. 80). : The higher the jackpot reliability, the longer the lighting production period, etc.),
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, by making the degree of expectation for the player different between the first pattern and the second pattern, and making the presentation period different, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect of the light emission effect and improve the game entertainment. .

The invention according to means 3 is
It is a game machine (pachinko game machine 1 etc.) provided with a light emitting part (LED 9: left frame LED 9b, sky frame LED 9a, right frame LED 9c, feature LED, board LED, light guide plate, segment display, dot display, etc.) And
It further comprises a light emission effect means (effect control board 12: effect control CPU 120 etc.) capable of executing a light emission effect using the light emission unit,
The light emission effect means can execute the light emission effect by a plurality of light emission patterns (light emission pattern table 1211 of FIG. 62: various light emission patterns) having at least a part of light emission modes (light emission colors, etc.),
The plurality of light emission patterns are
All are light emission modes including light emission of a specific color (single color: blue, green, red, etc.),
The degree of expectation (big hit reliability etc.) for the player is different, and the light emission unit time for the specific color is different (FIG. 67: while single color blue, green, red emits light continuously, rainbow The color repeats in order of blue → green → red, so the emission time as a single color is short, the switching unit emission time Δtn is shorter than the continuous unit emission time Δtm, etc.)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, by making the degree of expectation for the player different and making the light emission unit time for the specific color different among a plurality of light emission patterns, attention may be paid to the difference in the period in which the specific color emits light. It becomes possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the game interest.

Also, as an invention related to means 4,
A gaming machine described in means 1 (the same applies to means 2 and 3),
The light emission effect means causes the light emission unit to end light emission although the timing (such as reach state occurrence timing) for causing the light emission unit to start light emission is common between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern. Differentize the timing (such as the timing when the light emission effect time has elapsed from the reach state occurrence timing) (FIG. 61, FIG. 80, etc.),
You may comprise the game machine characterized by the above.
According to this, although the timing for starting the light emission is common, by making the timing for ending the light emission different, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation.

Also, as an invention related to means 5,
A gaming machine described in means 1 (the same applies to means 2 and 3),
The light emission effect means includes a first step of causing the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode in which a first specific color (monochrome: blue etc.) is blinked, and a second specific color (monochrome: after the first step). It is possible to execute the light emission effect by the first specific pattern including the second step of causing the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode in which green, red, etc. are blinked, and after a period corresponding to the second step The light emission effect according to the second specific pattern can be executed (FIG. 80: single color: blue etc. → single color: green, red etc. → rainbow color etc.)
You may comprise the game machine characterized by the above.
According to this, by performing the light emission effect by the first specific pattern including two stages with different colors to be blinked, the effect effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, after the period corresponding to the second stage is completed, the player can feel a sense of expectation by executing the light emission effect by the second specific pattern.

Also, as an invention related to means 6,
A gaming machine described in means 1 (the same applies to means 2 and 3),
Variable display means (special symbol indicator 4: first special symbol indicator 4A, second special symbol indicator 4B, etc.) capable of executing variable indication (special symbol indication: first special symbol indication, second special symbol indication, etc.) )When,
Specific display means (such as hold indicator 25) capable of executing specific display (hold display, active display, etc.) corresponding to variable display by the variable display means;
And further
The light emission effect means executes the light emission effect according to the pattern according to the display mode (the color of the hold display, lighting / flashing, etc.) of the specific display by the specific display means (Holding display preview effect determining process of FIG. 78, FIG. Pre-reading mode determination table 1219),
You may comprise the game machine characterized by the above.
According to this, by performing the light emission effect according to the pattern corresponding to the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and to improve the game entertainment.

Also, as an invention related to means 7,
It is a game machine described in any one of means 1, 4 to 6 (the same applies to means 2 and 3),
Variable display means (special symbol indicator 4: first special symbol indicator 4A, second special symbol indicator 4B, etc.) capable of executing variable indication (special symbol indication: first special symbol indication, second special symbol indication, etc.) )When,
Control means (main board 11: game control microcomputer 100, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player;
And further
The light emission effect means executes the light emission effect by the second specific pattern when the display result by the variable display means is a display result controlled to an advantageous state by the control means.
You may comprise the game machine characterized by the above.
According to this, when the display result by the variable display means is a display result controlled to an advantageous state, by performing the light emission effect by the second specific pattern, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of expectation.

Also, as an invention related to means 8,
It is a game machine described in any one of means 1, 4 to 7 (the same applies to means 2 and 3),
The light emission effect means has a plurality of common patterns (light emission pattern table 1211 in FIG. 72: light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-, etc.) in which the color change aspect (white blue, white green, white red etc.) is common. 1 and LP 14-1 etc.) can execute the light emission effect by the second specific pattern,
In the plurality of common patterns, the degree of expectation (such as the big hit reliability) for the player is different, and the light emission cycle of the common color is different (FIG. 76: the higher the big hit reliability, the shorter the switching unit light emission time Δtn etc.) ,
You may comprise the game machine characterized by the above.
According to this, the effect of the light emission effect is enhanced by making the expectation of the player different and the light emission cycle of the common color different in a plurality of common patterns in which the color change aspect is common. Game interest can be improved.

Also, as an invention related to means 9,
A gaming machine according to any one of Means 1 and 4 to 8 (same as for Means 2 and 3),
There is further provided a specific effect execution means (such as a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (reach effect, etc.) corresponding to the notification of whether or not the advantageous state (such as a big hit game state) is advantageous for the player,
The light emission effect means executes a light emission effect based on a predetermined action of the player (a button operation: regardless of presence or absence of a button operation promotion notification, etc.) while the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect execution means.
You may comprise the game machine characterized by the above.
According to this, during the execution of the specific effect corresponding to the notification of whether or not the advantageous state is advantageous for the player, the effect of the light effect is enhanced by executing the light effect based on the predetermined action of the player, Game interest can be improved.

Also, as an invention related to means 10,
It is a gaming machine described in any one of Means 1, 4 to 9 (the same applies to Means 2 and 3),
The light emitting portion (light emitting body such as a hat shape, a stick shape, an arch shape) is configured to have a plurality of light emitting portions,
The light emission effect means can execute the light emission effect by a special pattern (such as a pattern for changing gradation of the colors of the plurality of light emitting portions) that emits the plurality of light emitting portions in different colors.
You may comprise the game machine characterized by the above.
According to this, by performing the light emission effect by the special pattern that causes the plurality of light emitting parts to emit light in different colors, the effect effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on A1-A19 shown below is contained in the form for implementing this invention. The invention according to the above means may further have the configuration of A1 to A19.

  (Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is an electronic component (for example, the board side LEDs 9d and 9e, the sky frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the first effect motor 303 for rotating the movable portion 302, The control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) for controlling the second effect motor 330 for sliding the movable member 321 and the electric component are driven according to the control signal by the serial communication method from the control means. Output means (for example, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, motor drive driver 412, and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) for outputting specific signals (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11). And the output means is connected in parallel from a specific signal output terminal grouped into a plurality of different groups. The output timing of the specific signal from the plurality of specific signal output terminals is different for each group (for example, as shown in FIG. 9, driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11). A data setting area (for example, shown in FIG. 42) having a plurality of layers (for example, layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 42) in which priority is set and output timings of output signals are dispersed for each group) Data area), and light emission data (for example, control data for causing the LEDs 9a to 9e to emit light) for performing light emission control of at least light emitters (for example, the LEDs 9a to 9e) of the electrical components in each layer of the data setting area ) Can be set, and the control means can perform light emission control of the light emitter based on the light emission data (for example, CP for effect control). In the case 120, the control data set in the control data area shown in FIG. 42 is output to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F), and light emission data is set in a plurality of layers of the data setting area. In addition, the light emission control of the illuminant is performed based on the light emission data set in the higher priority layer (for example, when the control data is set in a plurality of layers, the effect control CPU 120 includes The control data set in the layer to which the highest priority value is assigned is output to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F. According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the control accuracy of the electrical components while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  (Means A2) In means A1, the light emitting means including the plurality of light emitting elements is controlled to emit light based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output terminal of the same group of the output means (for example, the modification shown in FIG. As in FIG. 5, signals input to the same full color LED may be connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a deviation in the light emission timing of the light emitting means including the plurality of light emitting elements while suppressing the emission of radio waves to the outside of the gaming machine.

  (Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means, in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, a normal slew rate) And the second output state (for example, low slew rate output state (see FIG. 7 (2))) in which the waveform rises according to a mode of change slower than the first output state (see FIG. 7 (1)). Can be set to any of the output states (for example, setting the S terminal to L (low) will result in normal slew rate output, and setting the S terminal to H (high) will result in low through It may be configured to be set to rate output (see FIG. 6)). According to such a configuration, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing a malfunction can be enhanced according to the setting.

  (Means A4) Means A3 includes a plurality of output units (for example, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, motor driver 412, and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c), and the plurality of output units output the input control signal. When the setting of the output state is common (for example, as in the third modification shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the through output is set to the normal slew rate output for all serial-to-parallel conversion circuits, respectively). Alternatively, for example, as in Modification 4 shown in Fig. 16, the through outputs may be set to low slew rate outputs for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits. . According to such a configuration, design errors can be reduced while considering noise resistance.

  (Means A5) In any of means A1 to A4, the output means stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the control signal is input (for example, a time-out) The time-out function may be set to a valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (for example, see FIG. 6). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation failure due to a wiring failure or the like, and to control the electrical component stably.

  (Means A6) In the means 5, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs the production control process (see step S55) at least for a predetermined period (in this example, The control signal is repeatedly output every one second to continuously execute lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, the sky frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b and the right frame LED 9c, or the first effect motor 303 and the first effect motor 303 The control may be such that the drive control of the 2-effect motor 330 is continuously executed). According to such a configuration, control corresponding to the stop function of the output means can be realized.

  (Means A7) In means A5 or A6, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (for example, setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout function to invalid state, By setting the T terminal to H (high), the time-out function is set to the valid state (see FIG. 6). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stopping function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

  (Means A8) In any one of the means A1 to A7, the first operation (the standing operation that is the movement from the tilting position to the standing position) and the second operation (the tilting operation that is the movement from the standing position to the tilting position) A movable body (movable member 321) capable of) and effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing effects (processing during effect symbol variation (S75) and processing during a big hit game (S78), etc.) The effect executing means is a first pattern for executing the special effect of the first aspect according to the first operation of the movable body (The flame effect is performed at the time of the first movable body operation effect, and the second movable body operation effect is not performed Effect pattern A1, effect pattern A2 in which the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the movable object motion effect at the first time and the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the movable object motion effect at the second time After executing the special effect of the first mode, the second pattern that executes the special effect of the second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body (first movable body) It may be configured such that the effect can be executed by the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the operation effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the second movable body operation effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production by changing the aspect of the special production accompanying the first operation of the movable body, and to improve the interest of the production when the movable body operates. it can.

  (Mean A9) In any one of the means A1 to A8, the special effect is performed during the execution of the specific effect (fifth round, and it is controlled whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the definite changing state or not This is an effect (an effect of displaying an image in which the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed on the black image 1001 on the effect display device 5) executed at a timing before the challenge effect notified by the effect mode. Depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, the ratio that the predetermined notification is performed in the specific effect is different (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the effect pattern A1, The probability variation jackpot may be notified at a higher rate than when A2 is selected. According to such a configuration, the player is interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is to be executed, and the interest can be improved.

  (Means A10) In any one of the means A1 to means A9, the effect execution means executes a third pattern for executing the special effect of the second mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (during the first movable body motion effect). Lightning effect effect is performed and the second movable body operation effect is not performed Effect pattern B1, 1 At the time of the movable object operation effect, the lightning effect effect is performed and the lightning effect effect is also performed at the second movable body operation effect An effect can be executed with the effect pattern B2), and when the effect is executed with the third pattern, the proportion of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than when the effect is executed with the first pattern. It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the player expects the special effect of the second mode to be executed in accordance with the first motion of the movable body, but the special mode of the first mode is temporarily associated with the first motion. Even if the effect is executed, the interest in the special effect can be maintained because there is an expectation that the second effect of the second aspect will be executed in accordance with the subsequent first operation.

  (Means A11) Any one of the means A1 to A10 further includes an operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by the player, and changes the mode of the special effect according to the operation of the operation means (black image) It may be configured such that it is possible to change the image in which the flame effect image 1010 is superimposed and displayed on 1001 into an image in which the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001. According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the aspect of the special effect by the operation, and the interest of the special effect can be enhanced.

  (Means A12) In any one of the means A1 to A7, the first operation (standing operation that is movement from the tilting position to the standing position) and the second operation (tilting operation that is movement from the standing position to the tilting position) ) Capable of performing a production (production control changing process (S75), jackpot gaming process (S78), etc.) and the like. The effect execution means is a first pattern that executes the special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and the second movable body motion effect is not executed). Effect pattern A1, Effect pattern A2 in which the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the movable object motion effect at the first time and the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the movable object motion effect at the second time Accordingly, after the special effect of the first aspect is performed, the second pattern (first movable body to perform the special effect of the second aspect different from the first aspect according to the first operation after the second operation of the movable body The effect can be executed with the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed at the operation effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the second movable body operation effect, and the effect can be executed in the second pattern. The ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) may be higher than when the effect is executed in the first pattern. According to such a configuration, by making the aspect of the special effect accompanying the first movement of the movable body different, the attraction can be improved by diversifying the effects, and the attraction of the effect when the movable body operates.

  (Means A13) In the means A12, the special effect is a specific effect (a challenge effect that is executed during execution of the fifth round and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to a promiscuous state after the jackpot gaming state is finished). It is an effect to be executed at a timing earlier than that (an effect for displaying on the effect display device 5 an image in which the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001), the first pattern and the second pattern The ratio at which the predetermined notification is performed in the specific effect is different depending on which pattern of the effect is performed (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, compared to when the effect patterns A1 and A2 are selected) The probability variation big hit is notified at a high rate). According to such a configuration, the player is interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is to be executed, and the interest can be improved.

  (Means A14) In means A12 or means A13, the effect execution means executes a third pattern for executing the special effect of the second mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (the lightning effect effect is executed at the first movable body motion effect). And the second movable body operation effect is not executed effect pattern B1, 1, the effect effect is executed at the time of the movable body operation effect at the first time, and the effect pattern B2 at which the lightning effect effect is also executed at the second movable object operation effect Even if the production is executable and the production is executed in the third pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than the production in the first pattern. Good. According to such a configuration, the player expects the special effect of the second mode to be executed in accordance with the first motion of the movable body, but the special mode of the first mode is temporarily associated with the first motion. Even if the effect is executed, the interest in the special effect can be maintained because there is an expectation that the second effect of the second aspect will be executed in accordance with the subsequent first operation.

  (Means A15) Any one of the means A12 to A14 further includes an operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by the player, and changes the mode of the special effect according to the operation of the operation means (black image) It may be configured such that it is possible to change the image in which the flame effect image 1010 is superimposed and displayed on 1001 into an image in which the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001. According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the aspect of the special effect by the operation, and the interest of the special effect can be enhanced.

  (Means A16) In any one of the means A1 to A15, different light emission data is set in each layer of the data setting area according to the gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, the gaming state is The combination of control data set in layers 1 to 5 may be different depending on whether the low base state, the high base state, or the big hit gaming state. According to such a configuration, the light emission control of the light emitter can be performed in the priority order according to the game state, and the interest for the game can be improved.

  (Means A17) In the means A16, the light emission data for performing the light emission control of the light emitter in accordance with the error notification is set to the layer set with the highest priority among the layers of the data setting area regardless of the gaming state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 42, control data corresponding to an error notification may be set to the layer 5 having the highest priority regardless of the gaming state). According to such a configuration, the light emission control of the light emitter can be performed with priority given to the error notification regardless of the gaming state.

  (Means A18) In any of means A1 to A17, the output means (for example, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, motor driver 412 and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) include address information from the control means. Based on the control signal by serial communication system, output a specific signal by parallel communication system (for example, output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) to the electric component corresponding to the address information Address information is set discontinuously in a predetermined settable range with respect to at least a part of the electric components (for example, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, each light emitter driver 411 a, 411 b, 413 a ̃ Of the addresses that can be assigned to the motor drive driver 412, the address [0 ] - [06] has become unused address, during the address [04] to address [07] is discontinuous) it may be configured so. According to such a configuration, when there is a defect in the address information included in the control signal output from the control means, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction will occur in the control of the electrical component.

  (Means A19) In any of means A1 to A17, the output means (for example, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, motor driver 412, and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) include address information from the control means. Based on the control signal by the serial communication system, specific signals (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) by the parallel communication system are output to the electrical components corresponding to the address information, and a plurality of signals are output. The address information is set in a range above a predetermined value (for example, address [02]) exceeding the minimum value (for example, address [00]) among values in the predetermined settable range for the electric component of For example, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, each light emitter driver 411a, 411b, 413a-4. 3c or an address which can be assigned to the motor drive driver 412, not to be assigned immediately from the minimum value (for example, address [00]), but a predetermined value (for example, address [02]) exceeding the minimum value ) Configured to be given from the above, and configured so that an address (for example, addresses [00] to [01]) from the minimum value to a value less than a predetermined value is an unused address). Also good. According to such a configuration, when there is a defect in the address information included in the control signal output from the control means, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction will occur in the control of the electrical component.

  In addition, the modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the inventions according to (1) to (4) shown below. The invention according to the above means A1 to A19 may further have the configurations (1) to (4).

(1) Display means (effect display device 5 etc.) capable of displaying a plurality of effects (reach effect etc.);
A movable body (such as a movable member 321);
Movable body effecting means capable of executing the movable body effect to operate the movable body (effect control CPU 120, movable body effect processing in the effect symbol variation process of S75 in the effect control process of FIG. 40, etc.),
Out of a plurality of types of effect displays (battle reach effects, story reach effects, etc.) when the movable body effect is executed, effect effects display (battle reach in different modes depending on which effect display is performed) The particle effect image 71 corresponding to the effect, the flame effect image 73 corresponding to the story reach effect, etc.) can be displayed on the display means (FIGS. 51, 52, etc.) (S75 in the effect control process of FIG. 40) Effect effect display process etc. in the process during the effect design fluctuation).

  According to such a configuration, when the movable body effect is executed, the effect effect display of the different aspect can be displayed according to which of the plural types of effect display is performed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect in which the operation of the movable body and the production effect display of the display means are linked.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
When effect display (a battle reach effect etc.) of a specific type is executed among the effect display in which the movable object effect is executed, particles of the effect effect display (FIG. 51 (D), (E) in a specific aspect) An effect of superimposing the effect image 71 etc. on the specific type of effect display (display of the victory effect image) can be executed (FIGS. 51A to 51G, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to link a specific type of effect display in which the movable body effect is executed and an effect display of the display means, and the operation of the movable body by the specific type of effect display and the display means It is possible to further enhance the rendering effect which is linked with the rendering effect display of.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
Among the effect display in which the movable object effect is executed, when a predetermined type of effect display (a story reach effect etc.) is executed, the effect effect display in a predetermined mode (FIG. 52D, (E) An effect of superimposing and displaying the effect image 73 and the like on the predetermined image (black image 72 and the like in FIGS. 52D and 52E) displayed in the entire display area of the display means can be executed (see FIG. 52 in FIG. 52). A) to (G) etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to link a predetermined type of predetermined effect in which the movable body effect is executed and an effect display on the display unit, and in addition to emphasize the movable body effect, the game Can improve the interest of

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The movable body (movable member 321 and the like) is movable to a standby position (first position and the like shown in FIGS. 31 and 32) and an advance position (second position and the like shown in FIGS. 31 and 32).
When the game machine is activated, a confirmation operation (an initial operation in the movable member initialization process in step S51B of FIG. 39) for confirming the operation of the movable body and a break-in operation (FIG. 39) which moves the movable body The apparatus further includes control means (e.g., CPU 120 for effect control) that executes step S51A of 39 and the operation etc. in the movable member break-in process of FIG.

  According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body and a running-in operation for moving the movable body are executed. For this reason, since the movement of the movable body is not accustomed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable body from operating well.

It is the front view which looked at a pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the board | substrate side LED. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of top frame LED9a, left frame LED9b, and right frame LED9c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining slew rate setting of a through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control data format. It is an explanatory view for explaining output timing of a signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in case the control signal which one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board outputs is branched on the board. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 3; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 3; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 4; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 5; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 6; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 6; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 6; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 7; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 7; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connection example of a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit in a modification 7; It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each light-emitting body driver and a motor drive driver. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each light-emitting body driver and a motor drive driver. (A) is a front view showing a rendering unit, (B) is a rear view. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the production unit diagonally from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the production | presentation unit from diagonally back. (A) is a front view which shows the state which has a movable part in a tilting position, and (B) shows the state which has a movable part in a standing position. (A) is a pinion gear, (B) is a rear view which shows a rack gear. (A) is the schematic which shows the state which has a movable member in the 1st position, and (B) shows the state which exists in the 2nd position. (A) is the side view of the schematic which shows the state which has a movable member in the 1st position, and (B) shows the state in the 2nd position. (A) is a state in which the pinion gear meshes with the rack gear, (B) is a state in which the rack gear is moved, and (C) is a schematic view showing a state in which the rack gear is restricted. (A)-(D) are the principal part enlarged views which show the state of the gear until it will be in a control state. (A) is a restriction state, (B) is a state changed to the restriction release state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operation direction, and (C) is a schematic view showing a drive initial state. (A) is a restriction state, (B) is a state changed to the restriction release state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operation direction, and (C) is a schematic view showing a drive initial state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable member break-in process. It is a figure which shows an example of the data area for control. It is a time chart which shows the LED control example. It is a time chart which shows the LED control example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production execution setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production execution setting processing. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 1 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 2 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 3 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A) is a control part as the modification 4 of a movable part drive mechanism, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the control part as the modification 5 of a movable part drive mechanism. It is a display screen figure of an effects display apparatus when battle reach effects are performed. It is a display screen figure of a presentation display apparatus when story reach presentation is performed. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of the effect production and movable body production in a specific super reach production. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of the effect production in a specific super reach production, and movable body united operation production. It is a figure showing an example of a production pattern of movable body operation production and an effect production. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of a presentation display apparatus when movable body operation | movement production | presentation and an effect production | generation are performed. It is a timing chart which shows an example of control of movable body operation production and effect production. It is a display screen figure which shows the other display example of a presentation display apparatus when movable body operation | movement presentation and an effect presentation are performed. It is a timing chart which shows other examples of control of movable body operation production and effect production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for describing output timings of signals from drive output terminals in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is a figure for demonstrating the principle of light-emitting production. It is a figure showing an example of table composition of a luminescence pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of the light emission production distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table configuration of the light emission control table. It is a figure showing an example of data composition of data for luminescence control generation. It is a figure showing an example of data composition of data for luminescence control generation. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of an example of luminescence pattern, and the RGB value corresponding to each luminescence pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of data structure of gradation control data. It is a figure which shows an example of data structure of gradation control data. It is a figure which shows an example of data structure of gradation control data. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a flow of luminescence production processing. It is a figure showing an example of table composition of a luminescence pattern table. It is a figure showing an example of data composition of data for luminescence control generation. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of an example of luminescence pattern, and the RGB value corresponding to each luminescence pattern. It is a figure showing an example of data composition of data for luminescence control generation. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of an example of luminescence pattern, and the RGB value corresponding to each luminescence pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of an example of luminescence pattern, and the RGB value corresponding to each luminescence pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a flow of pending display notice production determination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a pre-reading mode determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the principle of light-emitting production. It is an explanatory view of change of luminescence color for every luminescence part.

[1. First embodiment]
[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main substrate. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side It explains as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is an opposing surface facing a player who plays a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. Pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as gaming machines) 1 are roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2 It consists of three. A game area 10 having a substantially circular shape in front view surrounded by the guide rails 2b is formed in the game board 2. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a ball striking device (not shown) and driven. Further, the gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the gaming area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. It is mainly composed of a board surface plate (not shown) provided with a guide rail 2b and the like, and a spacer member (not shown) attached integrally to the back side of the board surface plate. The game board 2 is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front with a non-light-transmitting member such as a plywood board, and a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b, etc. on the front game board surface. It may be configured.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right position of the game area 10), a first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of, for example, a 7 segment LED or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) and the like. A special symbol (also referred to as “special”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Near the center of the game area 10 in the game board 2, a presentation display device 5 as display means is provided. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special drawing by the first special symbol display 4A in the special drawing game and the fluctuation display of the second special drawing by the second special symbol display 4B. For example, in the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, effect patterns which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special game, the effect is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variable display of the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display 4A or the special drawing using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display 4B In synchronism with the game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols is to stop display of identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and end the variable display. .

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of effect symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as a suitable number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided above the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. In each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, a hold that displays the hold memory number (the number of the special figure hold memory) as the number of the variable storage hold memory information corresponding to the special figure game is specified. Memory display is performed.

  Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, with the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special view game. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. To be done.

  In the first special symbol display 4A, it is possible to specify the number of reserved memory information (first reserved memory information) generated based on the first start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening. The number of first special view holding memories is displayed by lighting (the number of lighting) of the LED. The second hold indicator 25B is capable of specifying the number of pieces of hold storage information (second hold storage information) generated based on the second start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. (2) The number of stored special storages is displayed by lighting (the number of lighting) of the LED.

  A first hold display area 5D and a second hold display area 5U are set at two locations on the left and right in the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first hold display area 5D, the first special figure hold memory number that can specify the number of the first hold memory information generated based on the first start winning is displayed by the number of sphere (circular) hold images H. Be done. In the second hold display area 5U, the second special figure hold memory number that can specify the number of second hold memory information generated based on the second start winning is displayed based on the number of sphere (circular) hold images H. Be done.

  In the first hold display area 5D, the hold image H is displayed in a mode in which the hold image increases on the left side every time the first hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the first hold storage information is performed Every time, the hold image H at the right end corresponding to the first hold storage information is erased, and display is performed in which the remaining hold images H are shifted rightward one by one. In the second hold display area 5U, the hold image is displayed in a mode in which the hold image H increases on the right side every time the second hold storage information is generated, and variable display based on the second hold storage information is performed Each time, the hold image H at the left end corresponding to the second hold storage information is erased, and display is performed in which the remaining hold images are shifted leftward one by one.

  While the variable display corresponding to the (shifted, shifted) hold display erased from each of the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U is shown, the fluctuation corresponding display corresponding to the change display is shown. An active display area AHA for displaying an image (hereinafter referred to as an active image or active display) AH is formed in the center of the hold display area. In the active display area AHA, the hold image H displayed in the first hold display area 5D or the second hold display area 5U has been displayed so far, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image AH is displayed in such a manner that it can be identified as corresponding to the hold image. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 5.

  In the hold display area, the hold storage information may be displayed in a combined display mode without distinguishing the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U. Such a summed pending storage display makes it easy to grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  With regard to the holding image H displayed in each of the first holding display area 5D and the second holding display area 5U, a holding display mode in which the mode of the holding display is changed before the variable display of the target holding storage information is executed. A change effect may be executed. In the on-hold display mode change effect, the display mode such as the color or the shape of the on-hold image H is changed.

  For example, the color of the holding image H can be changed to blue, green and red. When it is determined that the hold display mode change effect is executed at a predetermined ratio, and the variable display result based on the hold storage information to be the effect is a jackpot display result, the change after the change is performed at a ratio of blue <green <red. When the color of the reserve image H is selected and determined, while the variation display result is an off display result, the color of the reserve image H after change is selected and determined at a ratio of red <green <blue. As a result, the expectation for a big hit based on the color of the reserved image H after change when the reserved display mode change effect is executed is set to be a ratio of blue <green <red. Therefore, when the hold display mode change effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for jackpot based on the color of the hold image after the change.

  Also, for the active image AH, similarly to the reserved image H, the display mode change effect is executed, and the display mode such as the color or shape of the reserved image H is changed. With regard to such a display mode change effect of the active display, the display mode such as the color or shape after the change is determined in such a mode that the degree of expectation to the big hit can be specified at the same selection ratio as the hold display mode change effect. The Note that the display mode change effect need not be executed for the active display.

  Below the effect display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (usually an electric character) is provided to form a second start winning opening as a start area (second start area).

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this manner, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing the game ball to the big winning hole, which is difficult for the player. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at the upper position of the second hold display 25B. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is a normal symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variation display). Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. Also, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings can be provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area 10, there is provided an out-port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Further, on the outer periphery of the gaming area 10, a sky frame LED 9a provided on the front frame, A left frame LED 9b and a right frame LED 9c are provided. In this embodiment, the sky frame LED 9a is provided above the front frame, the left frame LED 9b is provided on the left side of the front frame, and the right frame LED 9c is provided on the right of the front frame Yes. The game board 2 is also provided with board-side LEDs 9d and 9e. In this embodiment, a board-side LED 9 d is provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board-side LED 9 e is provided on the right side of the game board 2. A decorative LED is arranged around each structure in the game area 10 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an ordinary winning ball device 6A, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.). Also good.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 10 is provided. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping driving of a shooting motor provided in a hitting ball shooting device (not shown).

  A gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area 10 to a launching device (not shown). An upper plate (ball hitting supply plate) is provided to hold (reserve). Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes.

  A controller sensor unit 35A for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the controller sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. 4) a combination of a pair of two photo sensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the face of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod as seen from the player's side What is necessary is just to be comprised including a shape photosensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to detect the pressing operation from the player mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray or the like at the installation position of the push button 31B, for detecting a pressing operation performed by the player on the push button 31B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 executes the normal symbol variation display such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area 10 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. The normal symbol indicator is displayed on the basis of the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, for example, that the previous general symbol game has been completed The usual game by 20 is started.

  In this ordinary game, after a normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time which is a normal symbol change time elapses, a fixed normal symbol which is a normal symbol change display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “usually lost”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A special drawing game by the first special symbol display 4A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B, after the special symbol variation display is started, when the variation display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol variation display is performed. The finalized special symbol (special drawing display result) to be the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It is a loss. In addition, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) as a result of the predetermined display is stopped and displayed. The small hit game state may be controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, a round that is advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times in a big hit gaming state (advantageous state). Be controlled.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and special symbols indicating the symbol “−” are lost symbols. . In the case of stopping and displaying the small hit symbol, for example, a special symbol indicating the number "2" may be used as the small hit symbol. Each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” as the special symbols for the special figure game is stopped and displayed as the “big hit” as the specific display result, it is specially variable in the jackpot game state. In a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls is generated in the big winning door of the winning ball apparatus 7 , Open the grand prize opening. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  The special winning opening door with the big winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then the special winning opening is closed, thereby the special variable winning winning ball device 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  In the case where the small hit symbol (for example, the number “2”) is stopped and displayed, if the small hit symbol is derived as a confirmed special symbol, it is controlled to the small hit symbol game state as the special game state. good. Specifically, in the small hit game state, for example, in the same way as in the short-term open big hit game state in which substantially no exit ball (prize ball) is obtained, the special variable winning ball device 7 can be used for the player with a big winning opening. It suffices to execute a variable winning operation to change to an advantageous first state (open state).

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B, the variation display of the effect symbols is started. And the period from when fluctuation display of the production design is started until fluctuation display ends with the stop display of the fixed production design in each production design display area 5L, 5C and 5R of “left”, “middle”, “right” In such a case, the variable display state of the effect pattern may be in a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state refers to an effect design (“reach variation design”) that has not been stopped yet when the effect design that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R, etc.) in advance. The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect) that has not been stopped yet when the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating the alphanumeric character of “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the presentation symbols are changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R It is a display state which fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or a part of the combination.

  In response to the reach state, the variation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. Or change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or change the variation mode of the production symbol, so that the production operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed May be. Such an effect operation such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the change mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emitting body such as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e. The lighting operation (flashing operation), the operation of the movable member 321, and the like may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before the reach state.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of being a “hit” (also referred to as “reliability”, “hit reliability”, “expectation”, or “hit expectation”). That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol does not reach the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed effect design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") variation display mode when the variation display result is "loss".

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a fluctuation display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a fluctuation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the fluctuation display result is “loss”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the variation display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state when the jackpot symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that is a jackpot symbol as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed effect pattern to be a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "non-probable variation big hit combination") is displayed in a stopped state among a plurality of types of big hit combinations. In addition, the non-probable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a definite effect symbol without executing the reach effect.

  The determined effect design that is usually a big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is variably displayed, for example, in each of the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 Among the effect symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols having the even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “ It may be any as long as it is aligned and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "middle" and "right". The effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the finalized symbol of the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variable jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “usually big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. In addition, you may stop-display normal big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) as a fixed production pattern, without reach production being performed. Based on the fact that the variation display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the game is controlled to the normally open big hit gaming state, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. In the time saving control, as described later, so-called electric Chu support is implemented in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normally variable winning ball device 6B is increased. Here, the normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, etc., and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed is performed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  In the special symbol game, among the special symbols that become jackpot symbols, if the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the numbers “5” and “7” is stopped and displayed, the change display state of the effect symbol In response to the reach state being reached, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination and The determined effect design may be stopped and displayed. Note that the probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol without executing the reach effect. The confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number “1” that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. Among the effect symbols of “8”, the effect symbols whose symbol number is “5” or “7” are “left”, “middle” and “right” in each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R Any device that can be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line may be used. The effect symbols having symbol numbers “5” and “7” that constitute the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. When a probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a determined special symbol in a special figure game, a fixed effect symbol that is usually a big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the created symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed effect symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variation display mode in which the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game will have a "big hit" variation display result. This is referred to as a variation display mode of “probability variation” (also referred to as “big hit type”). In the present embodiment, among the big hit types of “probability change”, the normal open big hit gaming state is based on the fact that “5” and “7” change display results are “big hit” as the confirmed special symbols. After the termination, stochastic fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with time-saving control.

  The probability variation control result (special figure display result) becoming "big hit" in the special figure game of each time is improved to be higher than that in the normal state by performing these probability change control. The probability variation control may be ended when the condition that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state again after the big hit gaming state is ended. In the same manner as the time saving control, when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the time saving or 90 times different from the time saving) after the end of the big hit gaming state, the definite variation control is ended May be In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When time saving control is performed, control to make the variation time (general figure variation time) of the normal symbol in the regular drawing game by the regular symbol display 20 shorter than that in the normal state, or the variation of the normal symbol in each regular drawing game Control to improve the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control (electricity support control) that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied is performed. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the special drawing game can be executed frequently, so that The time until the variable display result is a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. In the present embodiment, the gaming state to be controlled is not set, but the probability changing state in which only time variation control is performed and time saving control and high opening control are not performed is also referred to as high probability and low base state . In addition, only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to distinguish from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which time saving control or high open control is performed without performing the probability change control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability change control nor the time saving control nor the high open control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time reduction control and probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game can be executed frequently, and the probability that the variation display result in the special figure game of each time will be a "big hit" As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state is not changed after the control to the small hit game state described above, and the game state before the change display result is “small hit” is displayed. Control may be continued.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Further, a drive control board 16B and light emitter control boards 16C to 16F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. Also, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and displays the effect display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, the movable portion 302, and the movable member 321 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is the display operation in the effect display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sky frame LED 9a and the left frame LED 9b provided on the game frame side, and the right frame The electric components for effect such as all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation of the LEDs 9c and the board side LEDs 9d and 9e provided on the game board 2 side, all or part of the operation of the movable part 302 and the movable member 321 The function of determining the control content for executing the production operation is provided.

  The effect control board 12 is connected with wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, wiring for transmitting an audio signal (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the like. . In addition, wirings for transmitting various signals to the drive control board 16B, the light emitting body control board 16C, and the light emitting body control board 16D are also connected through the effect control relay board 16A.

  The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 16B is a drive control signal indicating an instruction and control data for operating the movable portion 302 and the movable member 321 by driving the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. It should be included.

  The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16C only needs to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the panel-side LEDs 9d and 9e.

  The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16D includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the left frame LED 9b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 Good. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16E includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the sky frame LED 9a above the gaming machine frame 3. Just do it. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16F includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the right frame LED 9c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. It should just be.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16D relays only the effect control relay board 16A from the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 Is transmitted. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16E is transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 via the light emitter control board 16D in addition to the effect control relay board 16A. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16F is relayed from the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 to the light emitter control board 16D and the light emitter control board 16E in addition to the effect control relay board 16A. Is transmitted.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted.

  The effect control relay board 16A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 2, and transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D. Relay various signals. The back pack may be attached to a central portion on the back side of the game board 2, and an opening facing the effect display device 5 may be formed at the center. The back pack may be provided to cover the main substrate 11, the sound control substrate 13, the drive control substrate 16B, the light emitter control substrate 16C, and the like from the rear side. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 12 is accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack.

  The drive control board 16B is a control board for drive control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 12, the rotation control of the movable portion 302, the movable control, A driver IC for performing movement control of the member 321 is mounted. The output signal from the drive control board 16 </ b> B is transmitted toward the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330.

  The light emitter control board 16C is a control board for light emitter output mounted on the game board 2 and provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 12, the board. Various circuits for driving the light emitters are mounted for performing lighting control on the plurality of light emitters provided as the side LEDs 9d and 9e.

  The light emitter control boards 16D to 16F are mounted on the game machine frame 3 and are control boards for light emitter output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and commands and control data from the effect control board 12 are provided. Based on the above, various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are mounted.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in addition to the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F, for example, a board for performing lighting control of the light emitting portion 321A provided on the movable member 321 is also arranged. It is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called, for example. It is sufficient if it has. Further, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display 4A, a second special symbol display 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a general figure hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, the variation time of the effect symbol, the type of reach effect, and the pseudo-ream (originally one variation corresponding to one reserved memory, multiple times corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories) It is an effect display that makes it appear as if the fluctuations are continuously performed. One start is made to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one start winning prize. Fluctuations that indicate fluctuation modes, such as presence / absence of temporary stop and re-variation for a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, right) within the fluctuation time determined for winning. A variation pattern designation command indicating a pattern, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the effect display device 5, and a voice control used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R Mand, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, light-emitting body control command used to control lighting operation of panel side LEDs 9d, 9e, etc., drive control used to control operation of movable member 321, etc. Contains commands etc.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, etc., and the random number for indicating the random value independently of the CPU 120 for effect control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The electric components involved in the execution of the effect control such as the effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 in the effect control board 12 are also referred to as a effect control microcomputer.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 5 is disposed on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through the opening 2 c formed in the game board 2. A frame-shaped center decoration frame 51 is provided at the opening 2 c of the game board 2. In addition, a rendering unit 300 is provided between the rear surface of the game board 2 and the effect display device 5, and various effect motors (a first effect motor 303, A plurality of electronic components such as a second performance motor 330), a solenoid, a sensor, and a light emitting diode (LED) are connected. In FIG. 2, illustrations of these electronic components other than the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 are omitted.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 12, as with the main board 11, for example, random values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining various types of effects such as a notice effect are set.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. Yes.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 includes various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, the movable member 321, and the like. The effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns used to control the effect operation by the effect model etc. is stored. The effect control pattern is configured of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. Composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operation of production pattern, reach production, effect display operation in re-lottery production, etc. or various production display operations without variable display of production pattern Has been. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  In the special-figure variation production control pattern, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  In addition, as a notice effect performed during the fluctuation display of the effect design, for example, as described later, a movable notice with the movable member 321 as a movable body (movable object) ascends, a player controls the stick controller 31A or the push button Big hits such as an operation notice executed on condition that 31B is operated, a step-up notice that a predetermined image is switched stepwise, a line notice that a character appears and hits a line, a cut-in notice that a predetermined image is interrupted and displayed Jackpot announcement effect that suggests the possibility of reach, reach notice that suggests whether to become reach, pseudo-continuous notice that informs whether or not to become a quasi-ream, stop-symbol notice that announces a stop symbol, game state probability At the time of variable display start or reach establishment, such as a latent notice to announce whether or not it is in a fluctuating condition (whether it is latent or not) Stomach comprising a plurality of notice to be executed.

  FIG. 3A shows a configuration example of the drive control board 16B. As shown in FIG. 3A, a motor drive driver 412 is mounted on the drive control board 16B. The motor drive driver 412 receives a control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 16A. Then, the motor drive driver 412 controls the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

  FIG. 3B shows a configuration example of the light emitter control board 16C for performing lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e. As shown in FIG. 3 (2), light emitter drivers 411 a and 411 b are mounted on the light emitter control substrate 16 </ b> C. The luminous body driver 411a receives a control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 16A. Then, the light emitter driver 411a performs lighting control of the panel-side LED 9d based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In addition, a control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control substrate 12 is input to the light emitter driver 411b in serial signal format via the effect control relay substrate 16A and further via the light emitter driver 411a. . Then, the light emitter driver 411b performs lighting control of the panel-side LED 9e based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (2), in the light emitter control board 16C, the control signals transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 are sequentially arranged among the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 16C. By being transmitted (in this example, transmitted from the light emitter driver 411a to the light emitter driver 411b), it is configured to be transmitted to each light emitter driver.

  FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. As shown in FIG. 4, a light emitter driver 413 b is mounted on the light emitter control substrate 16 </ b> D. A control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 is input to the luminous body driver 413b in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 16A. Then, the light emitter driver 413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 9b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 4, the light emitter control boards 16 </ b> D to 16 </ b> F are mutually connected via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a light emitter driver 413a is mounted on the light emitter control board 16E. A control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 is input to the light emitter driver 413a in serial signal format via the effect control relay board 16A and further via the light emitter control board 16D. The Then, the light emitter driver 413a performs lighting control of the sky frame LED 9a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a light emitter driver 413c is mounted on the light emitter control board 16F. The light emitter driver 413c receives a control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A, and further via the light emitter control board 16D and the light emitter control board 16E. Input in serial signal format. Then, the light emitter driver 413c performs lighting control of the right frame LED 9c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, in the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, light emitters in which control signals transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 are mounted on different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, respectively. By being sequentially transmitted among the drivers 413a to 413c, they are transmitted to the respective light emitter drivers 413a to 413c.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, each LED provided on the game board 2 is comprehensively expressed as the board side LEDs 9 d and 9 e, but specifically, the board side LED 9 d is provided on the left side of the game board 2 A plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided, and a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the board side LED 9e on the right side of the game board 2. Moreover, in this embodiment, although each LED provided in the game frame is comprehensively expressed as the sky frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c, specifically, above the game frame A plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the sky frame LED 9a, and a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) as the left frame LED 9b on the left side of the play space It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the right frame LED 9c.

  In this embodiment, the lighting control of the motor driver 412, the light-emitting drivers 411 a and 411 b for performing lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9 d and 9 e, and the lighting control of the top frame LED 9 a, the left frame LED 9 b and the right frame LED 9 c are performed. The light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are realized by using the same kind of serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG.

  The serial-parallel conversion circuits used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c convert an input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs the signal in the serial signal format and the other that converts the signal in the 12-channel parallel signal format and outputs it. However, the number of circuit elements and terminals is limited. 5 and FIG. 6 exemplarily illustrates a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is described in the example shown in FIGS. Only the differences will be described. In this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b are realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the motor driver 412 and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. To be realized.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit receives a clock signal from the effect control CPU 120 via the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control boards 16D and 16E. A DATA / I terminal for inputting terminals and data is provided. Also, part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be through output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit as it is, and the CLK / O terminal through which the clock signal is output through is output. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the light emitter driver 413b of the light emitter control board 16D is a light emitter for the control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 16A. Although the light is output to the light emitter driver 413a of the control board 16E, the clock signal and data are respectively sent from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit realizing the light emitter driver 413b. Are output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the above. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the light emitter driver 413a of the light emitter control board 16E receives the control signal (the signal input via the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control board 16D) The clock signal and data are output to the light emitter driver 413 c of the light emitter control board 16 F, but the clock is respectively transmitted from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 413 a. The signal and data are configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the light emitter driver 413c.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and are converted into 24 channels from the serial signal format. Are decoded into parallel signal format signals. Then, after being temporarily stored in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 (AD0 to AD5 in the case of a 12-channel circuit) for decoding address input. By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. The data input from DATA / I also includes address information, and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit decodes only data that matches the address set in the input data to the parallel signal format signal. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

  In the 24-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, since 5 terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided for terminals for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-to-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected. Also, in the 12-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, since 6 terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for terminals for decoding address input, 64 types of addresses can be set at the maximum, and 64 serial-to-parallel conversions at the maximum Circuits can be connected.

  The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. . When the S terminal is set to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is low slew rate Set to output.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the through rate setting of the through output of the clock signal and the data. As shown in FIG. 7 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to an output of a normal slew rate, the slopes of rising and falling of the waveforms of the clock signal and data (voltage change per unit time Amount) is somewhat large. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to the low slew rate output, the clock signal and the clock signal are compared with the case of the ordinary slew rate setting. The rising and falling slopes of the data waveform become gentle.

  In general, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set it to the low slew rate output shown in FIG. On the other hand, in order to ensure resistance to noise, it is better that the slope of the waveform rises and falls, and it is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in FIG.

  The S terminal is set not only by setting the waveforms of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. A function of compensating the output waveform for data input from the / I terminal is provided. That is, generally, the clock signal and data output from the production control CPU 120 or the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but reach the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In the case where the transmission loss due to the wiring up to this point is large or the like, a clock signal or data having a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data as it is, but in this way the clock signal or data input in a state of a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave. Has a function of compensating for and outputting a waveform close to the original rectangular wave. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by the setting of the S terminal, the rising and falling slopes are compensated and output with a large waveform, so an output signal in a state closer to the original rectangular wave Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, since the voltage change amount increases momentarily when the rising or falling slope is large, there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase. On the other hand, if the low slew rate output is set by the setting of the S terminal, the rising and falling slopes are compensated and output to a smaller waveform, so compared to the ordinary slew rate output, it is extraneous. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, it is possible to reduce the amount of instantaneous voltage change and to suppress the increase of radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate.

  The function of compensating for the output waveform may be set to be enabled or disabled, and all functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. Further, the function of compensating the output waveform may be realized by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit and outside the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit.

  Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, the output waveform was compensated so that the rising and falling slopes were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. As an output setting, the input waveform may be output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is only necessary to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

  The T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a time-out reset function of signals output from the respective drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout reset function to an invalid state, and setting the terminal to H (high) sets the timeout reset function to an enabled state.

  When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the timeout reset function is enabled, clock signals and data are input from the CLK / I and DATA / I terminals, and signal outputs from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are output. After the start, when a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, it is assumed that a time-out has occurred, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the timeout reset function is set to the valid state, when it is desired to continuously supply a signal to each LED or operation motor from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, for example, at least a predetermined period from the effect control CPU 120 It is necessary to repeatedly output a control signal every (in this example, 1 second).

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 120 performs processing to rewrite the control signal every 10 ms, and when continuing the output from each drive output terminal, the CPU 120 for effect control every 10 ms. By repeatedly outputting a control signal to the serial-parallel conversion circuit, output from each drive output terminal is continued even if the timeout reset function is set to the valid state.

  The Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a drive system of signals output from each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. When the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be sink outputs.

  The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether or not to invert the output logic of the signal output from each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), normal output is performed without inverting the output logic of the output signal from each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In addition, when the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signal from each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is inverted and output.

  The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting resistors, it is possible to set the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

  The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. The power supply voltage used in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, when the power supply voltage used in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, it is possible to release an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage with the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

  Next, the control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of data received by the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is configured by the common format shown in FIG. 8 (1) and the basic format shown in FIG. 8 (2).

  As shown in FIG. 8 (1), the common format includes a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), a 5-bit decode address AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and 1 Composed of bit EX data. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is a basic format or an extended format described later, and is set to EX = 0 in the basic format.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for performing LED lighting control, lighting control including LED gradation control is performed by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. It can be performed.

  As the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 8 (1), the control data format following the common format is the extended format shown in FIG. 8 (3).

  As shown in FIG. 8 (3), the extended format includes 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, in the case of driving and controlling the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 using a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control can be performed unlike the case where lighting control of a light emitter such as an LED is performed. Since it is not necessary to do this, it is effective to use an extended format as shown in FIG. 8 (3).

  Although the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described with reference to FIG. 8, the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is, for example, the common data shown in FIG. The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Also, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 8 (2) is different in that it is shorter as it is configured to include 12-bit drive output terminals Q 0 to Q 23 of 6-bit data. Furthermore, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 8 (3) is different in that it is short because it is configured to include binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

  Further, in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are dispersed to achieve spread spectrum, and generation of radiation noise can be prevented to suppress radio wave radiation. . FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing output timings of signals from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, a clock signal of 6 MHz is output in the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are divided into six groups of four channels per group to disperse the signal output timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, group 1 is formed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is formed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q7. Group 3 is configured by four channels of Q11, group 4 is configured by four channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is configured by four channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23 are formed. Group 6 is configured by four channels. As shown in FIG. 9, the signal output timing is the same between the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1), but the drive output terminals ( For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

  Although FIG. 9 illustrates the output timing of the signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, the 12-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit uses an internal clock signal of 6 MHz at 1 MHz. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are divided into three groups of four channels per one group to disperse the output timings of the signals.

  Next, a connection example in which the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9 is used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c will be described. 10 to 12 are explanatory diagrams for describing connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Among them, FIG. 10 shows a connection example in the case of using a serial-parallel conversion circuit as light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for performing lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e. FIG. 11 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. Further, FIG. 12 shows a connection example in the case of using the serial-parallel conversion circuit as light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for performing lighting control of the sky frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b and the right frame LED 9c.

  First, a connection example in the case of using the serial-parallel conversion circuit as light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for performing lighting control of the panel LEDs 9d and 9e will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for performing lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e are realized by a 24 channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit.

  As described later, in this embodiment, the address [02] is assigned to the light emitter driver 411a (see FIG. 24), and as shown in FIG. 10, the terminals AD0 to AD4 for decoding address input are provided. Of these, AD1 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD0, AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 0010 (B) = [02]. .

  FIG. 10 shows a decoding address setting mode in the light emitter driver 411a. However, as will be described later, the address [03] is assigned to the light emitter driver 411b (see FIG. 24). Of the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 00001 (B) = [03]. Will be set to

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3 (2), the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e are all mounted on the same light emitter control board 16C. Since transmission of control signals between drivers is performed on the same light emitter control substrate 16C (no transmission across the substrate is performed), the resistance to noise does not have to be so important. Therefore, by setting the through output of the clock signal and data to a low through rate output, it is rather configured to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the T terminal to H (high), the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 MA.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the power supply voltage VCL (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 10, each drive output terminal Q0-Q23 is connected to panel side LED9d, 9e. In the example shown in FIG. 10, for convenience, a diagram in which one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal is shown. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, RGB is used. Three terminals may be configured to be connected to one color LED, or one terminal may be configured to be connected to one single color LED if a single color LED is used as a light emitter. . Also, for example, a plurality of single color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the motor driver 412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 is realized by a 12-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit. The

  As described later, in this embodiment, the address [04] is assigned to the motor drive driver 412 (see FIG. 24), and as shown in FIG. 11, the terminals AD0 to AD5 for decoding address input are provided. Of these, AD2 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD0, AD1, AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 000100 (B) = [04]. ing.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3A, since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 412 and another driver, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). Connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the T terminal to H (high), the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to become sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signal from each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is inverted and output.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 MA.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the power supply voltage VCC (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, terminals of four channels Q0 to Q3 of group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first first effect motor 303 . Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, terminals of four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second second effect motor 330. In this embodiment, since the two operation motors, the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330, are controlled, and the terminals Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 are unnecessary, Q8 to The terminal of Q11 is connected to the ground (GND).

  As described above, in the case of a 12-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, the output timings of the signals from drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are dispersed by being divided into three groups of groups 1 to 3 If the output timing is different between the signals output to the same operation motor (in this example, the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330), the drive accuracy of the operation motor may not be maintained. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the signals input to the same operation motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the drive accuracy of the operation motor is thus set. It prevents the situation that can not be maintained.

  On the contrary, for example, when connecting to the light emitting body, such as when connecting to the board side LEDs 9d and 9e described in FIG. 10, or when connecting to the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c of FIG. Therefore, since the problem of the driving accuracy as described above does not occur, even if the output timing is different among the signals output to the respective light emitters, it does not cause much trouble. Therefore, when the output signal from the drive output terminal is connected to a light emitter such as an LED, there is no need to worry about the output timing.

  Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. Ru.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [07] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413a (see FIG. 25), and as shown in FIG. 12, the terminals AD0 to AD5 for inputting decode addresses are provided. Of these, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 000111 (B) = [07]. .

  In FIG. 12, the decoding address setting mode in the light emitter driver 413a is shown. However, as will be described later, the address [08] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413b (see FIG. 25). Of the terminals AD0 to AD5 for decoding address input, AD3 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD0 to AD2, AD4, and AD5 are connected to ground (GND), and the decoding address is 001000 (B) = [ It will be set to 08]. Further, as will be described later, since the address [09] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413c (see FIG. 25), among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, A0 and AD3 are the power supply voltage VCC. (5V), AD1, AD2, AD4, and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 00101 (B) = [09].

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal through rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for performing lighting control of the sky frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b and the right frame LED 9c are different from each other on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Therefore, by setting the through output of the clock signal and the data to an output of a normal slew rate, it is configured to ensure tolerance to noise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the T terminal to H (high), the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 MA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, the power supply voltage VDL (12 V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 12, since the 12 V power supply voltage (VDL) and the 5 V power supply voltage (VCL, VCC) are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, The power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and protected to release an over voltage of 12 V or more.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 is connected to a plurality of light emitters as the sky frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. In the example shown in FIG. 12, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single color LEDs) that perform the same control are connected in series. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB may be connected to one color LED.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown, but the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are depending on the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, unused terminals may be connected to ground (GND).

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the time-out function is effective. Set to state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to turn on the sky frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the panel LEDs 9d and 9e in the effect control process (see step S55) described later. A signal is output, or a control signal for driving and controlling the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 is output. However, since the time-out function is set to an effective state, the control signal The output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (one second in this example) has elapsed, and lighting control and drive control can not be continued only by outputting. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a control signal repeatedly at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in an effect control process (described later) (see step S55). The lighting control of the board side LEDs 9d and 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c is continuously executed, and the drive control of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 is continuously executed. It controls to do.

  In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emission are performed every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the outputs from the drive output terminals of the body drivers 413a to 413c are automatically stopped, for example, after performing drive control of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330, Although the control for stopping the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 is performed, the driving of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 is not stopped due to a signal failure or malfunction It is possible to prevent a situation in which the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 cause burn-in.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the timeout function is set to the valid state is shown. However, the setting of the valid state and invalid state of the timeout function may be properly used according to the usage. For example, for the motor drive driver, the time-out function is set to the effective state from the viewpoint of preventing the burn-in of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330, while the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, the sky frame LED 9a, and the left frame LED 9b Unlike the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330, the right frame LED 9c and other light emitters do not cause problems such as burn-in, so the T terminal is set to L (low) and the time-out function is disabled. You may comprise so that it may set to a state.

  Further, in this embodiment, in order to continuously execute the lighting control and the drive control, the effect control CPU 120 repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (one second in this example) (specifically, Shows the case where the process of rewriting the control signal is performed every 10 ms to repeatedly output the control signal), but the present invention is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the CPU 120 for effect control (may be provided on the effect control board 12 or on another board such as the effect control relay board 16A). When the CPU 120 outputs a control signal once, the output circuit repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) based on the control signal output once. May be

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on hardware to cause time-out. Although the case where the reset function is set to the valid state is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the T terminal setting register and changing the setting value of the register according to the setting signal from the effect control CPU 120, the time-out function is enabled or disabled in software. May be configured to be set.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, an external resistance of a predetermined resistance value (10 k.OMEGA. In this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0. The drive current values of all outputs of -Q23, Q0-Q11 are set to 15 MA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance also exists, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It can be considered that the internal reference resistor is used, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed driving current value (for example, fixed 20 mA) or a large error (for example, Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor, an appropriate driving current value (15 MA in this example) is set, An error is also suggested (in this example, an error of ± 3%).

  In addition, as a light emitter driver and a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor can be used depending on the application. May be For example, in the case where a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs are densely provided for effect, when the light emission becomes sparse, the effect is adversely affected, so that an external reference resistance is used to reduce an error. It may be configured. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production, and the error may be somewhat large, so an internal reference resistor is used. It is also good.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical parts (in this example, the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the first unit for operating the movable unit 302 are operated. The control means (in this example, the effect control CPU 120) for controlling the effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 for operating the movable member 321 and the control signal by the serial communication system from the control means. Accordingly, output means (in this example, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b) that output specific signals (in this example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components, Motor driver 412 and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c). The output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a change manner equal to or higher than that of the input control signal (in this example, a normal output state). It is possible to set one of the output states of the slew rate output state and the second output state (in this example, the low slew rate output state) in which the waveform rises in a gradual change mode than the first output state. (In this example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. Specifically, if it is set to a low slew rate output state, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed, and if it is set to a normal slew rate output state, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 3 (2), a plurality of light output control boards 16C have a plurality of them. The light emitter drivers 411a and 411b are mounted, and control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b on the same light emitter control board 16C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in the present example, as shown in FIG. 10, in the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b mounted on the light emitter control board 16C, the S terminal is It is set to H (high) and is set to the low slew rate output state). Therefore, when another output unit is provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) to the board on which the output means is provided ( In this example, as shown in FIG. 4, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, and the light emission mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F having different control signals. Are sequentially transmitted between the body drivers 413a to 413c). In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 12, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F have S The terminal is set to L (low) and is set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the circuit board generally has high noise resistance, in the connection relation in the circuit board, the suppression of radio wave emission is prioritized and the output state of the low slew rate is set to a loose signal waveform. On the other hand, wiring members connected between boards (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) have low noise resistance, so in an abandoned relationship between circuit boards, priority is given to noise resistance and rectangular waves are output as normal slew rates. The signal waveform is close to With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) or to the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H on the hardware. (High) is set to the low slew rate output state, or L (low) is set to the normal slew rate output state. It cannot be caught. For example, by connecting the S terminal to the S terminal setting register and changing the setting value of the register in accordance with the setting signal from the effect control CPU 120, a low slew rate output state is achieved by software or the normal slew rate is set. The output state may be set to be set.

  Further, in this embodiment, transmission of a control signal according to a low slew rate output state between output means (in this example, light emitter drivers) mounted on the same board, or output means mounted on different boards Although the case where the board | substrate (in this example, the light-emitting body control boards 16C-16F) in which only any one of the transmission of the control signal by the output state of the normal slew rate is performed is shown, such an aspect It cannot be caught. For example, when a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. In addition, it may be configured such that a control signal is transmitted to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board. In this case, for example, even if the light emitter driver is mounted on the same light emitter control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the light emitter drivers is set to the low slew rate output state, and the other light emitters are set. The one that outputs the control signal to the light emitter driver mounted on the control substrate may be configured to be set to the normal slew rate output state.

  Also, even when a control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on the same light emitter control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When the control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, the output state of the normal slew rate may be set. FIG. 13 is an explanatory view showing a modification in the case where a control signal outputted by one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control substrate is branched on the substrate.

  In the first modification shown in FIG. 13, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output from one light emitter driver 413d mounted on the light emitter control board 16G is branched on the board, It is shown that the control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413e on the same light emitter control board 16G, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 16G. As shown in the first modification, even when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 413e and 413f even on the same light emitter control board 16G, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. Noise makes it more susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13, the S terminal may be set to L (low) and set to the output state of a normal slew rate to enhance the noise resistance of the control signal.

  That is, in the case where a plurality of other output means provided in the same substrate as the output means are connected in parallel to the output means (in this example, as in the first modification shown in FIG. 13, the light emitter control board A control signal (a through output of a clock signal and data) outputted by one light emitter driver 413d mounted on 16G is branched on the substrate, and one branched control signal is a light emitter on the same light emitter control substrate 16G When the other control signal transmitted to the driver 413e is branched and transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 16G), the output means is set to the first output state (in this example) In the light emitter driver 413d mounted on the light emitter control substrate 16G as in the first modification shown in FIG. 13, the S terminal is set to L (low) and the output state of the normal slew rate is set. ) May be configured to. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  In the second modification shown in FIG. 13, a control signal (a through output of a clock signal and data) outputted by one light emitter driver 413g mounted on the light emitter control substrate 16H is branched on the substrate, and one of the branches is branched. The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413h on the same light emitter control board 16H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown) on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The case is shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13, the S terminal may be set to L (low) and set to the output state of a normal slew rate to enhance the noise resistance of the control signal. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  That is, a plurality of other output means provided on each of the first board provided with the output means and the second board connected to the first board via the wiring member are connected in parallel to the output means. (In this example, as in the second modification shown in FIG. 13, the control signal (through output of clock signal and data) output by one light emitter driver 413 g mounted on the light emitter control board 16 H Is branched on the board, one of the branched control signals is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413h on the same light emitter control board 16H, and the other branched control signal is sent to an external light emitter control board (not shown). In the case of transmission to a light emitter driver (not shown), the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as in the second modification shown in FIG. 13, the light emitter control board 16H). Light emitter driver mounted on S terminal may be configured to L is set to (low) is set to the output state of the conventional slew rate) in 13 g. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output units (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. Signal (output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 in this example) (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. They are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group, and in the case of a 12 channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, they are grouped into 3 groups of 4 channels per group. The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit varies from group to group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 9, the output timing of the output signal from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is a group. Everywhere). Therefore, the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, the movable member (in the present example, the movable portion 302 and the movable member 321) that performs the operation is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 11, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the output unit stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) after inputting the control signal (in this example, the time-out function). (In this example, setting the T terminal to H (high) enables the timeout function to be enabled. See FIG. 6). For this reason, it is possible to avoid malfunctions due to wiring problems and to control the electrical components stably.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, in effect control process processing (see step S55)). By repeatedly outputting a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), the lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9d, 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c is continuously executed, Control is performed so as to continuously execute drive control of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330). Therefore, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). The time-out function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the setting of the stop function of the output means can be changed according to the application, and the cost can be reduced by the common use of parts.

  In this embodiment, serial-parallel conversion circuits 411a and 411b in which the clock signal and the through output of the data of the serial-parallel conversion circuits are connected to other serial-parallel conversion circuits on the same substrate, For the serial-parallel conversion circuit 412 to which the motors 303 and 330 are connected, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output (FIGS. 10 and 11). For the serial-parallel conversion circuits 413a, 413b, and 413c in which the through output of the clock signal and data is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the substrate, the S terminal is set to L (low) and the clock signal and The data slew output is set to the normal slew rate output (FIG. 1). It shows the reference) when, but not limited to such embodiments. For example, the through output of all the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine may be set to the output of a normal slew rate. The third modification in which the through outputs of all serial-to-parallel conversion circuits are set to the output of a normal slew rate will be described below.

  FIGS. 14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a connection example of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit in the third modification. As shown in FIG. 14, in the third modification, the S terminal is set to L (low) in the serial-parallel conversion circuits 411a and 411b whose through outputs are connected to other serial-parallel conversion circuits in the same substrate. The through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the third modification, the S-terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 412 to which the production motors 303 and 330 are connected is also set to L (low) and the clock signal and the data are passed through. Output is set to normal slew rate output. In Modification 3, the serial-parallel conversion circuits 413a, 413b, and 413c in which the through output is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the substrate are the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. Set to the slew rate output. Therefore, in Modification 3 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the through outputs are set to normal slew rate outputs for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the gaming machine.

  According to the third modification shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, since all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are unified so that the through output is set to the normal slew rate output, the circuit setting is shared. Design errors can be suppressed.

  Also, conversely, for example, the through outputs of all the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine may be set to the low through rate output. A fourth modification in which through outputs of all serial-to-parallel conversion circuits are set to low through rate outputs will be described below.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 16, in Modification 4, the S terminal is also set to H (high) in the serial-parallel conversion circuits 413a, 413b, and 413c in which the through output is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the substrate. Thus, the through output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output. In the fourth modification, serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 411a and 411b in which the through output is connected to another serial-to-parallel conversion circuit in the same substrate are the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. Set to low slew rate output. Further, in the fourth modification, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 412 to which the effect motors 303 and 330 are connected is the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. 11, and the through output is set to a low through rate output. Therefore, in the third modification shown in FIG. 16, the through output is set to the low through rate output for all the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine.

  According to the modified example 4 shown in FIG. 16, since all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are unified so that the through output is set to a low slew rate output, the design error is reduced by the common circuit setting. Can be suppressed.

  If all outputs are set to low slew rate output, it may be difficult to secure tolerance to noise in the case of through output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the substrate. In such a case, a buffer circuit with a built-in amplifier may be provided between it and the output destination of the through output. With such a configuration, the through output is amplified by the amplifier incorporated in the buffer circuit, and noise resistance can be secured to some extent even with a low through rate output.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the production motors 303 and 330 are connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the drive output terminals of the groups having the same output timing are connected (see FIG. 11). However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a full-color LED is used as the light emitter, the three output terminals (RGB terminals) of the same full-color LED may be configured to connect the drive output terminals of the group having the same output timing. Hereinafter, Modification 5 in which drive output terminals of groups having the same output timing with respect to full-color LEDs are connected will be described.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the fifth modification. As shown in FIG. 17, in Modification 5, one of the three drive terminals Q0 to Q2 among the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11. The R terminal, the G terminal and the B terminal of the full color LED of the eye are connected respectively. Also, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the three terminals Q4 to Q6 of the four channel terminals Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the R terminal and the G terminal of the second full color LED. And B terminals are connected respectively. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the three terminals Q8 to Q10 in the four channel terminals Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the R terminal and the G terminal of the third full-color LED. And B terminals are connected respectively.

  According to the fifth modification shown in FIG. 17, the light emission accuracy of the full-color LED can be secured by connecting to the drive output terminal belonging to the same group regarding the signals inputted to the same full-color LED.

  Since the number of terminals required for connection of the full color LED is 3 terminals (R terminal, G terminal and B terminal), as shown in FIG. 17, each of the 4 terminals of group 1, group 2 and group 3 is used. One of the terminals is not necessary for connection (in the example shown in FIG. 17, terminals Q3, Q7 and Q11). In this case, like the Q3 terminal and the Q7 terminal shown in FIG. 17, terminals unnecessary for the connection of the full color LED may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Further, terminals unnecessary for connection of full color LEDs may be used for other applications. For example, in the case where a movable member for production (production effect) is configured to be operated by driving a solenoid, the solenoid for the production effect can be connected with one terminal, so that Q11 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the solenoid 500 for the effect character may be connected to a terminal unnecessary for connection of the full color LED.

  Also, for example, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of production-use movable members (production effects), in the case where the production effects provided symmetrically in the game area are operated in some manner synchronously, You may comprise so that the solenoid for production | presentation objects provided symmetrically may be connected to the drive output terminal of the same group. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the operation system of the movable members that are operated synchronously, such as the rendering combination provided symmetrically.

  Further, for example, in the case of providing a director for a director, a predetermined power control IC may be connected between the drive terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit and the lock solenoid for the director. . In this case, the predetermined power control IC is a power switch (so-called high-side switch that outputs power from the output terminal side only when a high-voltage input of a predetermined value or more is input to the input terminal side. -It is connected to the drive terminal of the parallel conversion circuit, and the output side is connected to a lock solenoid for a director, for example, when a plurality of solenoids for directors are provided, The input side of the side switch may be connected to the drive terminal of the same group, and the high-side switch and the lock solenoid for the effect actor may be controlled by a signal from the drive terminal of the same group. Also, for example, terminals unnecessary for connection of a full color LED in the same group (in this example, the Q3 terminal, the Q7 terminal, and the Q11 terminal) The high-side switch connected to, may be or configured to connect the lock solenoid for performance won game on the output side of the high-side switch to.

  For example, when lighting control of a 7-segment LED or a dot display is performed, the input to the 7-segment LED or the dot display is configured to be connected to a drive terminal of the same group. You may comprise so that an output timing may be match | combined.

  Also, if there are unused terminals in the drive output terminals of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, when those unused terminals are not connected, surge voltage is input to those unused terminals due to factors such as static electricity. May cause problems such as excessive heat generation or damage to internal circuits. In view of the above, it is conceivable to provide a protective circuit for preventing a surge voltage inside the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, but this is not preferable because the manufacturing cost of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit increases. Therefore, the unused terminals are configured to be connected to a predetermined reference potential, and the surge voltage is dissipated to the reference potential side of a predetermined power supply substrate (not shown), so that excessive heat generation or damage to the internal circuit You may comprise so that generation | occurrence | production of malfunctions, such as, may be suppressed. Hereinafter, Modification 6 in which the unused terminal of the drive output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the ground (GND) as a reference potential will be described.

  18 to 20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the sixth modification. Among these, FIG. 18 shows a modification of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the panel side LED is connected to 18 drive output terminals Q0 to Q17 out of 24 drive output terminals Q0 to Q24, but 6 drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are not used. The unused terminals of the six drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are connected to the ground (GND).

  FIG. 19 shows a modification of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. In the example shown in FIG. 19, each stage motor is connected to eight drive output terminals Q0 to Q7 out of twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are not yet connected. The unused terminals of the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are connected to the ground (GND).

  FIG. 20 shows a modification of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. In the example shown in FIG. 20, the LED for each frame is connected to nine drive output terminals Q0 to Q8 out of twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to each other. The unused terminals of the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to the ground (GND).

  According to the modified example 6 shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, even if a surge voltage is generated, the surge voltage can be released to the ground (GND) side, and problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to internal circuits occur. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the sixth modification shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, an external resistance of 3 kΩ is further connected to the VP terminal which is an electrostatic protection terminal for protection. By configuring the external resistor to be connected to the VP terminal in this way, even if a surge voltage is generated, it is possible to prevent a current exceeding the rated current from flowing through the VP terminal, resulting in excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. The occurrence of problems such as these can be further suppressed.

  18 to 20, the case where the unused terminal is connected to the ground (GND) as a reference potential has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and may be connected to another fixed potential. You may comprise. A seventh modification will be described below in which the unused terminal of the drive output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to a fixed potential as the reference potential.

  FIG. 21 to FIG. 23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification example 7. FIG. Among these, FIG. 21 shows a modification of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e. In the example shown in FIG. 21, the panel-side LED is connected to 18 drive output terminals Q0 to Q17 of 24 drive output terminals Q0 to Q24, but 6 drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are not used. The unused terminals of the six drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are connected to VCL (5 V) as a fixed potential (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

  FIG. 22 shows a modification of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. In the example shown in FIG. 22, each stage motor is connected to eight drive output terminals Q0 to Q7 out of twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are not yet connected. The unused terminals of the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are connected to VCC (5 V) as fixed potentials (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

  FIG. 23 shows a modification of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the LED for each frame is connected to nine drive output terminals Q0 to Q8 out of twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected. The unused terminals of the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to VDL (12V) as fixed potentials (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

  According to the modified example 7 shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if a surge voltage is generated, the surge voltage can be released to the fixed potential (VCL (5 V), VCC (5 V), VDL (12 V)) side, respectively. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit.

  Further, also in the seventh modification shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, an external resistance of 3 kΩ is connected to the VP terminal which is an electrostatic protection terminal for protection. By configuring the external resistor to be connected to the VP terminal in this way, even if a surge voltage is generated, it is possible to prevent a current exceeding the rated current from flowing through the VP terminal, resulting in excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. The occurrence of problems such as these can be further suppressed.

  The examples shown in FIGS. 21 to 23 show the case where the unused terminals are connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, regardless of the power supply voltage connected to the VP terminal, connecting unused terminals to VDL (12 V) uniformly, etc. so that the surge voltage can be released by connecting to a sufficiently high power supply voltage It may be configured. Alternatively, for example, a power supply voltage for surge voltage countermeasure may be provided, and the unused terminal may be uniformly connected to the power supply voltage for the surge voltage countermeasure.

  In this embodiment, addresses are assigned in advance to the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412. 24 and 25 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of addresses given to the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412. FIG.

  In this embodiment, in the effect control board 12, the addresses of the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412 shown in FIGS. Is stored in the address management table. Then, as described above, the connection states of the light emitter drivers 411a, 411b and 413a to 413c and the terminals AD0 to AD4 (or AD0 to AD5) for decoding address input of the motor drive driver 412 are set in advance. The assigned address is set, and the address managed using the address management table on the effect control board 12 side matches the address actually set for each driver.

  In this embodiment, when the lighting control CPU 120 performs the light emission control of the top frame LEDs 9a to 9c and the board side LEDs 9d and 9e, the address of the light emitter driver corresponding to the light emitting LED is provided in the ROM 121. The read address is read from a predetermined address storage area, the read address is set in the setting bit of the decode address of the control data format shown in FIG. By outputting to 411a, 411b, and 413a to 413c, the light emission control of the sky frame LEDs 9a to 9c and the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e is performed.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 performs drive control of the effect motors 303 and 330, the address of the motor drive driver 412 corresponding to the effect motors 303 and 330 is a predetermined address storage area provided in the ROM 121. 8, the read address is set in the setting bit of the decode address of the control data format shown in FIG. 8 (see FIG. 8 (1)), and the control data in which the address is set is output to the motor drive driver 412. Then, drive control of the production motors 303 and 330 is performed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 applies to addresses that are not set in the address management tables shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (in this example, addresses [00], [01], [05], [06], etc.). Does not output control data (except in the case of malfunction due to data corruption).

  In this embodiment, the addresses [00] and [01] are unused addresses. The address [02] is assigned to the light emitter driver 411a, and the address [03] is assigned to the light emitter driver 411b. The address [04] is given to the motor drive driver 412.

  Furthermore, the addresses [05] and [06] are considered as unused addresses. The address [07] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413a, the address [08] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413b, and the address [09] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413c.

  In addition, as already described, the light emitter driver 411a having the address [02] and the light emitter driver 411b having the address [03] are configured by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the serial data is transmitted. The data is converted into parallel data and supplied to the 24 board-side LEDs 9d and 9e of the game board 2, respectively.

  Also, as described above, the motor driver 412 whose address is [04] is configured by a 12-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, converts serial data into parallel data, and drives the first effect motor 303. Are output from the four output terminals (Q0 to Q3) as drive signals for driving, and are output from the four output terminals (Q4 to Q7) as drive signals for driving the second effect motor 330. In this embodiment, the areas of the output terminal numbers 08 to 23 among the areas corresponding to the address [04] of the predetermined address storage area are unused areas.

  As described above, the light emitter driver 413a whose address is [07], the light emitter driver 413b whose address is [08], and the light emitter driver 413c whose address is [09] are 12 channels. The serial data is converted into parallel data, and is supplied to twelve sky frame LEDs 9a, left frame LED 9b, and right frame LED 9c of the game frame, respectively. In this embodiment, among the areas corresponding to [07] to [09], the address of the predetermined address storage area is the area of output terminal numbers 12 to 23 which is an unused area.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in this embodiment, address information is set for a plurality of electrical components in a range equal to or greater than a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value among values in the predetermined settable range. . Specifically, in this embodiment, a plurality of electrical components (in this example, panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, and first effect for rotating the movable unit 302) Of the addresses that can be assigned to each light emitter driver and motor driver that outputs control data to the motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 for sliding the movable member 321, the minimum value (in this example, the address [ 00]), it is configured to be given from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value (in this example, address [02]) or more, and an address less than the predetermined value from the minimum value. (In this example, addresses [00] to [01]) are configured to be unused addresses.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in this embodiment, address information is set discontinuously within a predetermined settable range for at least some of the plurality of electrical components. Specifically, in this embodiment, a plurality of electrical components (in this example, panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, and first effect for rotating the movable unit 302) Motor 303, second rendering motor 330 for moving movable member 321), and among the addresses that can be given to each light emitter driver and motor drive driver that output control data, each light emitter driver and motor drive actually There is a portion where the address given to the driver is discontinuous (in this example, addresses [05] to [06] are unused addresses, and addresses [04] to [07] ] Is discontinuous).

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the address is assigned so as to be discontinuous, or the address is assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value, an unset address is included. Even if control data is sent, as long as the address is not set for any driver, there is no risk of erroneously outputting a signal to any LED, motor, or other electrical component. It is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction in the control of the electrical components when the data address information is incomplete.

  In general, when there is a change in the number of LEDs or production motors in the development stage of a gaming machine, or when there is a change such as the integration of the board to be used, each driver such as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver On the other hand, it is necessary to reassign the address, and there is a possibility that the development efficiency of the gaming machine is lowered. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the address is provided so as to be discontinuous or the address is provided from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value, it is not necessary at the development stage. Even if a new driver is generated, the address assigned to the driver that is no longer needed is treated as a missing number so that the address is not reassigned. Assigning addresses (for example, addresses [00], [01], [05], [06] shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25) can eliminate the need for address reassignment. Costs can be reduced and development efficiency can be improved.

  It should be noted that the manner of assigning addresses to the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412 is not limited to the modes shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, and various modes are conceivable.

  For example, although the example shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 shows the case where addresses [00] and [01] are assigned as unused addresses to each driver from addresses [02] or more, only address [00] is not available. You may comprise so that it may give to each driver from address [01] or more as a use address. Further, the number of unused addresses may be further increased, and for example, addresses [00] to [02] may be assigned as unused addresses to each driver from addresses [03] or more.

  For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the addresses [05] and [06] are unused and the addresses are discontinuous. However, only the address [05] is unused and the addresses are changed. The address may be configured to be discontinuous, or the number of unused addresses may be increased, and for example, the addresses [05] to [07] may be configured to be unused addresses to be discontinuous. .

  In the example shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit (in this example, a motor drive driver 412 and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) and a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit (in this example) , The light emitter drivers 411a and 411b) are managed using a single table, but the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit and the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit are separately used. Address management may be configured.

  Also, in this embodiment, only the address allocation has been shown in a case where the address is assigned so as to be discontinuous, or the address is assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value. Regarding the output terminal number of the driver, the output terminal number may be set to be discontinuous, or the output terminal number may be set from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value. For example, the luminous body driver 411a set at the address [02] is configured such that the output terminal numbers [00] and [01] are unused terminal numbers and are set to the respective LEDs from the output terminal number [02]. The output terminal numbers [05] and [06] in the middle may be set as unused terminal numbers, and the output terminal numbers set in each LED may be discontinuous.

[Operation of pachinko machines]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A or 2 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the special symbol display 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process, thereby determining the normal symbol variation display mode using the random number MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result, and performing the display operation (for example, turning on the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20. , Turning off, etc.) to enable variable display of the normal symbol and setting of the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B, and the like.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits the control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example of these, in the command control process, the output port included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, by turning it off, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 37 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S21). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in S22 to S29 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit.

  In the start winning determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning or a second start winning by the first starting opening switch 22A or the second starting opening switch 22B, and if there is a winning, special map display The random number value MR1 for result judgment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type judgment, and the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, an empty entry in the first special view reserve storage unit If it is the second start winning combination, it is stored at the top of the vacant entry in the second special view reservation storage unit.

  The special symbol normal process of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol indicator are displayed based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit and the second special symbol storage unit. It is determined whether or not to start the special game with 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the special symbol variation display result in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B). One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern can be selected from any of a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns using numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination based on the result of the prior determination of whether or not the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It includes the process of deciding whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing of S22 and the variation pattern setting processing of S23, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the confirmed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which becomes the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The process which determines the fluctuation | variation display mode of is included.

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes processing to measure Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of S25 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 4A or the second special symbol display unit 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol that is the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is on. When the big hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the like, for example, a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit open processing of S27 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". .

  The big hit release post-processing in S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end process, the big hit game state is ended by the rendering device such as the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the sky frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, the movable member 321 and the like. Various settings to start waiting time until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation to be notified elapses, and to start the probability variation control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state ( And processing for setting a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag). When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  In the big hit end process, the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is read out, and it is specified whether the big hit type is “non-probable variation big hit” or “probable variation big hit”. . Then, if it is determined that the identified jackpot type is not "non-probable variation big hit", setting (setting of a probability variation flag) for starting the probability variation control is performed. In addition, when the specified big hit type is “non-probable variable big hit”, the setting for starting the time reduction control (in advance corresponding to the setting of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special game that can be executed during the time reduction control). A predetermined count initial value (in this embodiment, “100” is set in the short-time counter).

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S51).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes movable member break-in processing to execute the break-in operation of moving the movable member 321 (S51A). The movable member break-in process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms the operation of a plurality of types of movement patterns of the movable member 321 in the effect such as the notice effect, or uses the position detection sensor 333 to detect the initial position of the movable member 321 (in the present embodiment, the first position). Position) is detected, or a movable member initialization process for moving the movable member 321 to the initial position is executed (S51B).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an error notification process which is one of the processes for executing the error effect (S54A). In the error notification process of step S54A, for example, in response to an error designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100, an error image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 5, and an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Error notification or the like is performed by an output operation, an error light emission operation in the LEDs 9a to 9e, and the like.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 5.

  Next, an effect random number updating process for updating the count value of a counter for generating effect random numbers such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display notice effect determination process of determining the display pattern of the hold storage display together with the presence or absence of the hold display notice effect (S71). A hold display update process is executed to update the hold storage display in the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U to a display corresponding to the stored content of the start winning reception command buffer (S72).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs one of the processes in S73 to S79 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S73): It is checked whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the gaming control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect pattern variation start process (S74).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S74): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S75). In this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process, an effect execution setting process for performing LED control described later is also executed.

  During the effect symbol fluctuation process (S75): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S76).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (S76): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern confirmation command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77) or the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S73).

  Big hit display process (S77): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (S78).

  Big hit game processing (S78): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (S79).

  Big hit end effect processing (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S73).

[Structure of production unit]
Next, the rendering unit 300 will be described based on FIGS. FIG. 3: (A) is a front view which shows a presentation unit, (B) is a rear view. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view showing the effect unit obliquely from the front. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view showing the rendering unit as viewed obliquely from behind. 29A is a front view showing a state where the movable part is in the tilted position, and FIG. 29B is a front view showing a state where the movable part is in the standing position. FIG. 30 is a rear view showing (A) a pinion gear and (B) a rack gear. 31A is a schematic diagram illustrating a state where the movable member is in the first position, and FIG. 31B is a schematic diagram illustrating a state where the movable member is in the second position. FIG. 33 is a schematic view showing (A) a state in which the pinion gear meshes with the rack gear, (B) a state in which the rack gear is moved, and (C) a state in which the rack gear is restricted. FIG. 34: (A)-(D) is a principal part enlarged view which shows the state of the gear until it will be in a control state. FIGS. 35A and 35B are schematic views showing a restricted state, FIG. 35B a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operating direction, and FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic view showing (A) in the restricted state, (B) in a state changed to the restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operation direction, and (C) in the drive initial state.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the effect unit 300 is provided between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, and is a base portion 301 fixed at a predetermined location. A movable portion 302 provided to be rotatable with respect to the base portion 301, a tilting position for tilting the movable portion 302 horizontally (see FIG. 29A), and a standing position for standing vertically (FIG. 29 ( B)), and a first effect motor 303 that rotates between them.

  A bearing hole 310 is formed through the base portion 301, and a guide groove 311 having an arc shape centering on the bearing hole 310 is formed around the bearing hole 310. At the lower right position of the bearing hole 310 on the back surface of the base portion 301, a first effect motor 303 that rotates the movable portion 302 is fixed on the back surface, and the drive projecting forward through the base portion 301. A rotary disk 312 is fixed to the tip of a shaft (not shown).

  A shaft member 313 that faces in the front-rear direction protrudes from a predetermined peripheral edge of the turntable 312, and the lower end of the link member 314 is pivotally supported by the shaft member 313. Further, a detection piece 315 is provided on the opposite side of the periphery of the turntable 312 to the shaft member 313, and the detection piece 315 is detected by a position detection sensor 316 provided below the turntable 312. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the movable portion 302 is at the tilting position.

  The movable portion 302 includes a pivoting member 320, a movable member 321 provided slidably on the front side of the pivoting member 320 relative to the pivoting member 320, and a movable member on the back side of the pivoting member 320. 321 and a rack gear 322 that moves integrally. The movable member 321 can be reciprocated between a first position on the rotating shaft 325 side with respect to the rotating member 320 and a second position farther from the rotating shaft 325 than the first position.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable effect of moving the movable member 321 between the first position and the second position when the movable unit 302 is in the standing position. ing. When the movable member 321 is at the first position, at least a portion is retracted below the display screen of the effect display device 5, and at least a portion is superimposed on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5 at the second position. (See FIG. 1).

  The rotation member 320 is a substantially plate-like member extending in the left-right direction, and is provided on the right side of the front surface so as to protrude from the rear side of the rotation hole 325 by being inserted into the bearing hole 310 from the rear side. The first guide shaft 326 inserted into the guide groove 311 from the rear side, and the second guide shaft 327 protruding from the upper right side of the rotation shaft 325 and inserted from the rear side into the guide groove 311 are protruded. There is.

  The upper end of the link member 314 is pivotally supported by a tip of a second guide shaft 327 which is inserted into the guide groove 311 and protrudes to the front side of the base portion 301. That is, the turntable 312 and the rotation member 320 are connected via the link member 314. In addition, a coil spring 328 is provided on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 325, which always biases the rotation member 320 toward the standing position.

  On the left side of the first guide shaft 326, a linear slide groove 329 for guiding the movable member 321 in the left-right direction is extended in the left-right direction. A second effect motor 330 for sliding the movable member 321 is fixed above the slide groove 329 on the front surface of the rotation member 320, and a drive shaft that protrudes through the base portion 301 and protrudes rearward A pinion gear 331 for operating the rack gear 322 is fixed to the tip of 330a. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the second effect motor 330.

  A hook 332 that is engaged with the left end of the tension spring 323 for biasing the rack gear 322 is provided on the rear surface on the left side of the rotating member 320 so as to protrude rearward. In addition, a position detection sensor 333 that detects a detection piece 334 formed at the right end of the rack gear 322 is provided on the right rear surface, and the detection piece 334 is detected by the position detection sensor 333, thereby performing the effect control. The CPU 120 can specify that the movable member 321 is located at the first position.

  The movable member 321 includes a disk-like light emitting portion 321A and an attaching portion 321B extending to the right from the light emitting portion 321A. The light emitting unit 321A is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) (not shown) inside, and is capable of emitting light forward. Further, two bosses 334a and 334b are provided on the back surface of the mounting portion 321B, and the bosses 334a and 334b are inserted into the slide groove 329, and the rack gear 322 is screwed from the back side of the rack gear 322 By fixing 322, the movable member 321 disposed on the front side of the rotating member 320 and the rack gear 322 disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 320 are integrated.

  The integrated movable member 321 and rack gear 322 are guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the rotating member 320 by inserting two bosses 334 a and 334 b into the slide groove 329. Further, on the right side of the rack gear 322, a hook 335 is protruded rearward so that the right end of the tension spring 323 is locked to the hook 332 of the rotating member 320. That is, one end of the tension spring 323 is locked to the hook 332 of the rotation member 320 and the other end is locked to the hook 335 of the rack gear 322, so that the movable member 321 is always directed to the second position side. Energize.

  In the effect unit 300 configured as described above, the movable portion 302 is located at the tilt position as shown in FIG. 29A in the initial driving state. Then, when the rotary disk 312 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the first effect motor 303, the second guide shaft 327 is pulled downward by the link member 314, and the front view is centered on the rotational shaft 325. It rotates about 90 degrees clockwise, and rotates to the standing position shown in FIG. 29 (B). Since the biasing force of the coil spring 328 acts when rotating from the inclining position to the upright position, the load on the first effect motor 303 is reduced. Further, the first effect motor 303 is reversely driven to rotate from the standing position to the tilt position.

  Next, the detailed structure of the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30A, the pinion gear 331 is a rotary gear having a plurality of drive teeth protruding from a part of the circumferential surface of the disk member. The drive teeth have a plurality of drive teeth 340A protruding in the rotational direction, and a tooth thickness L2 in a pitch circle having a radius from the drive shaft 330a to a position where the teeth mesh with each other than the tooth thickness L1 of the drive teeth 340A. The driving teeth 340B have a large driving tooth 340B, and the tooth thickness dimension L3 in the pitch circle is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the driving teeth 340A and 340B (tooth thickness dimension L1 <L2 <L3). ).

  In addition, since the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3 of the drive teeth 340A, 340B, and 340C are different from each other in this way, the tip surface 342A of the drive tooth 340A, the tip surface 342B of the drive tooth 340B, and the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C. The circumferential length dimension in each is the same as the relationship between the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3. That is, the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface 342B is longer than the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface 342A, and the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface 342C is the circumferential direction of the tip surfaces 342A and 342B. It is longer than the length dimension of.

  In the present embodiment, the front end surfaces 342A and 342B are flat surfaces, and the front end surface 342C constituting a restricting portion described later is a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a.

  The tooth gap dimension L4 between each drive tooth 340A and drive tooth 340A and the tooth gap dimension L5 between drive tooth 340A and drive tooth 340B are the same (tooth gap dimension L4 = L5), and drive tooth 340A. The tooth gap dimension L6 between the gears 340C and the drive teeth 340C is longer than the tooth gap dimensions L4 and L5 (L4, L5 <L6). These drive teeth 340A, 340B, and 340C are formed over about one third of the circumferential surface, and the remaining two thirds of the circumferential surface are notches 341 in which the drive teeth are circumferentially removed. Yes. That is, the pinion gear 331 has on its peripheral surface a meshing portion having driving teeth and meshing with the rack gear 322 and a meshing portion not having driving teeth and not meshing with the rack gear 322.

  In the present embodiment, the pinion gear 331 is the first operating direction in which the clockwise direction in FIG. 30A moves the rack gear 322 from the second position to the first position, that is, in the first direction. The rotation is the second operation direction that moves the rack gear 322 from the first position to the second position, that is, in the second direction.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (B), the rack gear 322 is a gear having a plurality of driven teeth protruding from a part of the side surface of the rod-like member. The driven teeth include a plurality of driven teeth 350A projecting along the side surface on the pinion gear 331 side, a driven tooth 350B having a tooth thickness dimension L12 larger than a tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 350A at a position where the drive teeth mesh, The thickness dimension L13 has the driven tooth 350C longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the driven teeth 350A and 350B (tooth thickness dimension L11 <L12 <L13). Moreover, the front end surface of each driven tooth 350A, 350B, 350C is a flat surface.

  The tooth gap dimension L14 between each driven tooth 350A and the driven tooth 350A and the tooth gap dimension L15 between the driven tooth 350A and the driven tooth 350C are the same (tooth gap dimension L14 = L15), and the driven tooth 350A. A tooth space dimension L16 between the tooth and the driven tooth 350B is longer than the tooth space dimensions L14 and L15 (L14, L15 <L16).

  The tooth groove dimensions L14 and L15 in the rack gear 322 correspond to the tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive tooth 340A, and the tooth groove dimension L16 corresponds to the tooth thickness dimension L2 of the drive tooth 340B. . Further, the tooth gap dimensions L4 and L5 in the pinion gear 331 are dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 350A, and the tooth gap dimensions L6 are dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C. .

  The driven teeth 350A, 350B, and 350C are formed from the lower portion in the longitudinal direction of the side surface to substantially the center in the vertical direction, and the upper portion from the center is a dropout portion 351 in which the driven teeth are dropped in the longitudinal direction. That is, the rack gear 322 has a meshing portion that has driven teeth and meshes with the pinion gear 331 and a non-meshing portion that does not have driven gears and does not mesh with the pinion gear 331 on the side surface.

  In the present embodiment, the rack gear 322 moves between the upper second position and the lower first position in FIG. That is, the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operation direction to move from the second position to the first position, that is, moves in the first direction, and the pinion gear 331 rotates in the second operation direction from the first position to the second position. It moves to the position, that is, in the second direction.

  Next, the operation modes of the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 will be described based on FIGS. In the present embodiment, since the movable member 321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable part 302 is in the standing position, the movable part 302 is in the standing position below. The description will be made with reference to the vertical and horizontal directions.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the movable member 321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 302 is in the upright position will be described, but the movable portion 302 is in the inclined position. Sometimes, the movable member 321 may reciprocate between the first position and the second position during rotation.

  As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the movable member 321 (rack gear 322) has a lower first position where the boss 334b is located at the lower end of the slide groove 329 with respect to the rotating member 320, and The boss 334a can reciprocate in the vertical direction between the upper second position located at the upper end of the slide groove 329.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the movable member 321 is subjected to an upward biasing force by the tension spring 323 at the first position, but the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 have drive teeth 340C as described later. When the tip of the follower tooth 350C of the leading end surface 342C of the first contact surface 342C comes into contact, the state changes to a restricted state (locked state) that restricts the upward movement of the movable member 321 due to the urging force of the tension spring 323. The movable member 321 is held at the first position even when the motor 330 is in the off state. The details of the restricted state (locked state) will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, when the restricted state is released, the movable member 321 is moved upward by the urging force of the tension spring 323 and then held at the second position by the tension spring 323. That is, the urging force by the tension spring 323 exceeds the load of the movable member 321.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operating direction as shown in FIG. 33 (B) in a state where the drive teeth 340B mesh with the corresponding driven teeth 350B from above. Thus, the drive teeth 340A and the corresponding driven teeth 350A mesh with each other, and the rack gear 322 moves in the first direction (downward) against the upward biasing force of the tension spring 323. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), the toothed tip of the driven tooth 350C comes into contact with the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C, and the rack gear 322, that is, the movable member 321 is held in the first position. The

  Here, the details when changing from the restriction release state to the restriction state (locked state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 33A, when the movable member 321 is in the second position, the drive teeth 340A and 340B mesh with the driven teeth 350A and 350B as the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operating direction. Thus, the rack gear 322 moves in the first direction against the upward biasing force of the tension spring 323, and the movable member 321 descends toward the first position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 34A, before the engagement of the drive teeth 340A adjacent to the drive teeth 340C among the plurality and the driven teeth 350A adjacent to the driven teeth 350C of the plurality is released, the drive teeth 340C are released. And the driven teeth 350C are meshed, and the meshing of the drive teeth 340A and the driven teeth 350A is released. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), after the drive tooth 340C is opposed to the missing portion 351 of the rack gear 322, the tip of the drive tooth 340C moves from the root to the tip of the tooth surface of the driven tooth 350C. I will.

  As shown in FIG. 34C, when the tip of the driving tooth 340C is separated from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 350C by the rotation of the pinion gear 331, the meshing between the driving tooth 340C and the driven tooth 350C is released. That is, the drive tooth 340C is an adjacent drive tooth adjacent to the missing portion 341, and the driven tooth 350C is an adjacent driven tooth adjacent to the missing portion 351 (the drive tooth 340C is the rear of the first direction among the plurality of driven teeth. Since the transmission of the power to move the rack gear 322 in the first direction is interrupted by the meshing of the subsequent drive teeth and the driven teeth, the rotation of the pinion gear 331 is stopped. Thus, when the tooth tip of the drive tooth 340C is separated from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 350C and the engagement between the drive tooth 340C and the driven tooth 350C is released, the rack gear 322 tries to move in the second direction by the urging force of the tension spring 323. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 34C, when the pinion gear 331 further rotates, the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C intersects the tooth tip line T passing through the tooth tips of the driven teeth 350A, 350B, 350C of the rack gear 322. To do. At this time, as described above, the transmission of the power for moving the rack gear 322 in the first direction due to the meshing of the subsequent drive tooth and the driven tooth is interrupted, so that the rack gear 322 receives the first force by the urging force of the tension spring 323. In order to move in two directions, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C comes into contact with the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C.

  Thus, the contact point S with respect to the drive tooth 340C in the driven tooth 350C moves from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 34A) to the tooth tip of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 34B). , Move to the tip end surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 34 (C)). That is, the tip end surface 342C is shifted so as to slide in a sliding contact from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C toward the tooth tip.

  Thereafter, when the tip of the driven tooth 350C reaches a substantially central position in the circumferential direction of the tip end surface 342C, the second effect motor 330 is turned off and the rotation of the pinion gear 331 is stopped (see FIG. 34D). . In this state, the tip end surface 342C is inclined to the rack gear 322 side in the second direction so as to intersect the tooth tip line T, and the rack gear 322 is directed upward by the biasing force of the tension spring 323. Since the tip of the driven tooth 350C is pressed against the tip end surface 342C by being urged, the restriction state (lock state) is established in which the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction is restricted. That is, the drive teeth 340 </ b> C and the driven teeth 350 </ b> C constitute restriction means for restricting the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction (upward direction).

  Further, the pinion gear 331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the front end surface 342C constituting the restricting portion is configured by a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331. Thus, as shown in FIG. 34C, after the contact point S of the driven tooth 350C with respect to the drive tooth 340C moves from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C to the tip surface 342C, the pinion gear 331 reaches the position shown in FIG. Does not displace the contact point S between the driven tooth 350C and the tip end surface 342C in the second direction of the rack gear 322, so that the rack gear 322 moves slightly according to the rotation of the pinion gear 331, that is, the movable member 321. Can be prevented from slightly rising to give the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  For example, when the tip surface 342C constituting the restricting portion is a flat surface, as shown in FIG. 34C, the contact point S of the driven tooth 350C with the drive tooth 340C is changed from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C to the tip surface 342C. After the movement, when the pinion gear 331 rotates to the position shown in FIG. 34D, the contact point S ′ between the driven tooth 350C and the tip surface 342C is displaced in the second direction of the rack gear 322. Further, when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operation direction to release the restricted state, the urging force by the tension spring 323 is increased as compared with the case where the distal end surface 342C is a curved surface, and therefore for the second effect. The load applied to the motor 330 is increased. Accordingly, the tip end surface 342C is preferably configured as a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331.

  In the present embodiment, since the second effect motor 330 is a stepping motor, the drive teeth 340C are stopped at the restricted position shown in FIG. 34D by the number of steps (rotational angle) from the reference position. The rotation of the pinion gear 331 can be stopped. For example, a sensor or the like that detects that the drive tooth 340C is in the restriction position shown in FIG. 34 (D) is provided, and the pinion gear 331 is rotated based on the detection status from the sensor. The rotation may be stopped.

  Also, when changing to the restricted state, stop positions at which the rotation of the pinion gear 331 is stopped are set, for example, at a plurality of locations within the range where the driven teeth 350C abut the tip surface 342C, and stop at different locations every predetermined number of times. By doing so, it is possible to prevent deformation of the tip end surface 342C due to wear due to repeated stopping. In this case, for example, extending the tip end surface 342C in the circumferential direction of the dropout portion 341 can be considered.

  Next, a method for canceling the restricted state will be described. First, in the restricted state shown in FIG. 35A, by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction, the drive tooth 340C moves, and the tip of the driven tooth 350C separates from the tip end surface 342C. Is opposed to the rack gear 322 and the intersection of the tip end surface 342C and the tooth tip line T is released, the restriction of the driven tooth 350C by the tip end surface 342C is released, and the restricted state is changed to the restricted release state.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (B), the rack gear 322 is raised in the second direction by the tensile force of the tension spring 323 when the restriction is released, so that the movable member 321 moves from the first position toward the second position. Move fast. In the present embodiment, since the first position is the initial driving position, as shown in FIG. 35C, the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operating direction even after the restriction is released. When the drive tooth 340B reaches a position where it meshes with the driven tooth 350B, the second effect motor 330 is turned off to stop the rotation of the pinion gear 331.

  Therefore, when moving the movable member 321 from the second position to the first position, the pinion gear 331 is further rotated in the first operation direction, so that the rack gear is engaged with the drive teeth 340B and 340A and the driven teeth 350B and 350A. 322 can be moved in the first direction. In this way, the movable member 321 can be moved from the first position to the second position and can be moved from the second position to the first position by simply rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction. The control load of the effect control CPU 120 that controls the second effect motor 330 can be reduced.

  FIG. 36 shows another example of the method of releasing the regulation state. In the restricted state shown in FIG. 36 (A), by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operation direction opposite to the first operation direction, the drive teeth 340C are moved and the tooth tips of the driven teeth 350C are moved from the tip surface 342C. The tip surface 342C and the tooth tip line T are separated from each other, but the driven tooth 350C enters the tooth gap between the driving tooth 340C and the driving tooth 340A, and is driven as shown in FIG. Since the tooth surface of the tooth 350C contacts with the tooth surface of the driving tooth 340C, the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction by the tension spring 323 is restricted by the contact with the driving tooth 340C.

  Therefore, the rack gear 322 can be raised by the rotation of the pinion gear 331 by further rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operation direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, when the restricted state is released by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction in the restricted state, the movable member 321 is moved from the first position at the predetermined speed by the biasing force of the tension spring 323. 36, when the restricted state is released by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operation direction in the restricted state, as shown in FIG. 36, the movable member 321 is moved from the first position to the second position at an arbitrary speed. It can be moved to the position.

  Specifically, if the pinion gear 331 is rotated at a low speed, the movable member 321 can be raised at a low speed, and if the pinion gear 331 is rotated at a high speed, the movable member 321 can be raised at a high speed. Moreover, it can be raised in various ways, such as being stopped while being raised, or moved up and down.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the pinion gear 331 as the drive gear that is rotated (operated) by the second effect motor 330 as the drive source, and the pinion gear 331 A rack gear 322 as a driven gear to be meshed, and the rack gear 322 is urged by a tension spring 323 in a second direction opposite to the first direction moved (actuated) by the pinion gear 331, and the pinion gear 331 is And a missing portion 341 in which a part of the drive teeth 340A, 340B, and 340C are missing, and a tip surface 342C as a restricting portion provided at the tip of the drive tooth 340C as an adjacent drive tooth adjacent to the missing portion 341. After the meshing of the drive teeth 340C and the driven teeth 350C of the rack gear 322 is released, the driven teeth 350C Movement in the second direction of the rack gear 322 is restricted by abutting the 42C.

  That is, when the engagement between the drive teeth 340C and the driven teeth 350C is released and the missing portion 341 faces the rack gear 322, the driven teeth 350C of the rack gear 322 biased in the second direction come into contact with the tip surface 342C. Movement in the second direction is restricted. As described above, the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction can be restricted by using the front end surface 342C provided on the drive teeth 340C of the pinion gear 331, so that the rack gear 322 and the movable member 321 move in the first direction. It is possible to stop the operation of the rack gear 322 with a simple structure by the drive gear and the driven gear without increasing the number of parts by separately providing the control means for restricting the movement.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the rack gear 322 which is a driven gear was urged | biased by the 2nd direction by the tension spring 323, this invention is not limited to this, A driven gear is a thing other than a spring member. It may be biased in the second direction by the biasing means. Further, for example, when the movable portion 302 is provided upside down, the rack gear 322 is always urged downward (the second direction) by the load of the movable member 321, and hence the rack gear 322 is urged in the second direction by its own weight. Are included.

  The pinion gear 331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the rack gear 322 is a first position (position shown in FIG. 31A) and a second position different from the first position (FIG. 31 ( C), and the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operation direction that operates the rack gear 322 in the first direction, so that the drive teeth 340A, 340B, 340C and the driven teeth 350A, After moving from the second position to the first position by meshing with 350B and 350C, the missing portion 341 faces and the meshing between the drive teeth 340A, 340B and 340C and the driven teeth 350A, 350B and 350C is released, It is biased in the second direction by the tension spring 323 and operates from the first position to the second position.

  As described above, the rack gear 322 can be reciprocated only by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction, so that the control load of the second effect motor 330 can be reduced.

  Further, in the restricted state in which the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction by the contact of the driven teeth 350C with the tip surface 342C is restricted, the pinion gear 331 is moved in the first direction as shown in FIG. It can be released by operating in a second operating direction opposite to the first operating direction as shown in FIG.

  By doing this, when the restricted state is not released even if the pinion gear 331 is rotated in one of the first operation direction and the second operation direction, the rack gear 322 is released by being operated in the other direction. This makes it easy to avoid that the driven tooth 350C is engaged with the tip end surface 342C and cannot move the rack gear 322.

  Further, in the restricted state, the operation mode of the rack gear 322 differs between when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operation direction and when it is rotated in the second operation direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operating direction, the rack gear 322 is raised by the urging force of the tension spring 323, and as shown in FIG. 36 (B). When the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the second operation direction, the rack gear 322 is raised according to the rotation of the pinion gear 331, so that the operation mode of the movable member 321 integrated with the rack gear 322 can be diversified.

  The tooth thickness L3 of the drive teeth 340C is longer than the tooth thicknesses L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 340A and 340B (for example, tooth thickness L1 <L2 <L3). By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to a load applied to the drive teeth 340C when the meshed state is changed from the non-engaged state not meshed with the driven teeth 350A, 350B, 350C. In addition, since the tooth thickness dimension L3 is widened, the tip end surface 342C constituting the restricting portion is also widened, which makes it easy to restrict the driven tooth 350C.

  The pinion gear 331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the distal end surface 342C that constitutes the restricting portion is configured by a curved surface that follows an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331. Even if the pinion gear 331 rotates while the driven tooth 350C is in contact with the front end surface 342C, the contact point S between the driven tooth 350C and the front end surface 342C is not displaced in the moving direction of the rack gear 322. The rack gear 322 can be prevented from being slightly moved according to the rotation of the gear.

  Further, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C meshing with the drive tooth 340C in the driven tooth is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the other driven teeth 350B and 350C (tooth thickness dimension L11 <L12). <L13) By doing this, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to a load applied to the driven tooth 350C when the non-engaging state in which the driving tooth 340C is not engaged is engaged. Further, in the state of being in contact with the restricting portion, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to a load applied by the force biased in the second direction.

[Cable of production unit]
26, FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the effect unit 300 is provided with a cable 361 for supplying power to the LED of the light emitting portion 321A of the movable member 321.

  FIGS. 32A and 32B schematically show the side surfaces of FIGS. 31A and 31B, respectively. In FIG. 32, for easy viewing, the distance between the movable member 321 and the pivoting member 320 and the distance between the pivoting member 320 and the rack gear 322 are drawn wider, but in actuality, they are shown in the figure. It is narrower than.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the cable 361 is moved from the connector 363 provided on the relay board from the effect control board 12 of the base 301 to the movable member 321 via the pressing member 364 of the cable 361 provided on the rotating member 320. The light emitting unit 321A is connected to a connector 362 provided on an LED substrate on which the LED of the light emitting unit 321A is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, when the movable member 321 stands by at the first position, the portion of the cable 361 between the pressing member 364 and the connector 362 is in a considerably bent state. .

  As shown in FIG. 32 (B), when the movable member 321 is advanced to the second position, the portion between the pressing member 364 of the cable 361 and the connector 362 is extended and there is not much room. Become.

  Therefore, a force in the direction from the second position to the first position is applied to the movable member 321 by the cable 361. In the state where the cable 361 is extended, the covering material of the cable 361 is a resin, so when the cable 361 is cold, the force applied to the movable member 321 by the cable 361 is smaller than when the cable 361 is not cold. Become stronger.

  The tension spring 323 is pulled by the second effect motor 330 until the movable member 321 reaches the second position. Therefore, the second effect motor 330 can generate a force stronger than the tensile force (biasing force) in the state where the tension spring 323 is pulled most.

  As described above, the biasing force of the tension spring 323 exceeds the load of the movable member 321. However, when the urging force by the tension spring 323 is increased, the output of the second effect motor 330 that pulls the tension spring 323 needs to be increased. The use of a motor with a large output increases the manufacturing cost, so the output of the motor is preferably minimized.

  As the tension spring 323 in the present embodiment, not only the load of the movable member 321 but also the force of pulling the movable member 321 when the cable 361 is extended, and the cost of the second effect motor 330 are considered. A spring that can obtain the minimum required biasing force is used.

  Therefore, if the cable 361 of poor quality is used and it becomes hard at low temperature, it is conceivable that the biasing force of the tension spring 323 is insufficient when the movable member 321 is first moved. Usually, a cable that is harder than expected at low temperatures is not used.

  However, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has been left and cooled at night is started in order to prevent a situation in which the urging force of the tension spring 323 is insufficient, a later-described diagram is used. As shown in step S515 of 41, a running-in operation for getting used to the movement of the movable member 321 is performed. By performing a break-in operation of moving the movable member 321 from the first position to the second position, the cable 361 can be flexed and extended and the cable 361 can be flexibly fitted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the biasing force of the tension spring 323 runs short.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the cable 361 is a device that emits heat (the effect display device 5, the first effect motor 303, and the second effect motor 330). Since the cables 361 are provided in the vicinity, the cable 361 is kept in a highly flexible state by heat.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the movable member break-in process (S51A) in the effect control main process. Referring to FIG. 41, the CPU for effect control 120 controls the first effect motor 303 to move the movable unit 302 to the upright position (S511).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable portion 302 (S512). When it is determined that an abnormality is detected (YES in S512), the effect control CPU 120 reports an abnormality of the movable unit 302 (S513). The notification is performed by display on the effect display device 5 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation for stopping the notification has been performed by a store clerk of the amusement store (S514). When it is determined that an abnormality in the movement of the movable unit 302 has not been detected (NO in S512), and when it has been determined that an operation to stop notification has been performed (YES in S514), the effect control CPU 120 is movable. The second effect motor 330 is controlled to move the member 321 to the first position (S515). Here, the movable member 321 may be reciprocated between the second position and the first position.

  As described above, since the movable member is moved by the second effect motor 330 having a stronger force than the tension spring 323, the movable member 321 can be moved more reliably. This allows the movement of the cable 361 and the movable member 321 to be accustomed by the cable 361 being in a bent state and in an extended state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an abnormality has been detected in the movement of the movable member 321 (S516). When it is determined that an abnormality is detected (YES in S516), the effect control CPU 120 reports an abnormality of the movable member 321 (S517). The notification is performed by display on the effect display device 5 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation for stopping the notification has been performed by a store clerk of the game store (S518). If it is determined that an abnormality in the movement of the movable member 321 is not detected (NO in S516), and if it is determined that an operation to stop the notification is performed (YES in S518), the effect control CPU 120 executes Return the process to be performed to the caller of this process.

  Next, control of the LEDs 9a to 9e will be described. The LEDs 9a to 9e can emit light (turn on, blink, etc.) with a plurality of light emission patterns corresponding to the effects to be executed. When the control data is set in the control data area provided in the RAM 122, the effect control CPU 120 can control the LEDs 9a to 9e to emit light (light on, blink, etc.) in a predetermined light emission pattern. ing.

  The control data set in the control data area is data for performing light emission (lighting, blinking, and the like) control in each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F. Specifically, an identifier for uniquely identifying each of the light emission patterns is assigned, and the control data described above is data indicating the identifier. When the control data is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 reads the control data and outputs the data to the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F. In each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F, the LEDs 9a to 9e are turned on by controlling each of the light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c so as to emit light with the light emission pattern identified by the identifier indicated by the control data. / Driven off. On the other hand, when the control data area is NULL, it is determined that control data is not set in the control data area. Further, the timing at which the control data is set is timing prior to the timing at which the control is started by the control data or the timing at which the control is started by the control data. In the following description, when demonstrating the effect by any one of LED9a-9e, it may only express as LED effect.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control data area. The control data area includes at least one control data area and another control data area. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, five control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 are included. Each layer corresponds to a sound effect that outputs a sound. For example, the “error” effect is an effect in which a screen showing an error is also displayed on the effect display device 5, and corresponds to an effect of outputting an error sound. The sound effect includes an effect (silence effect) that does not produce sound, and there may be an LED effect corresponding to the silence effect. The LED effect corresponding to the silent effect is an effect that causes the LED to emit light instead of turning off the LED.

  Also, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 have priorities set, and layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 (layer 1 is the highest in order of increasing priority). The priority is low, and layer 5 has the highest priority). Here, “priority is set” specifically means that when the production control CPU 120 controls the LEDs 9a to 9e, layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1 in this order. It is determined whether control data is set or not, and control data set in the control data region determined to be set is output to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F. Therefore, priority is given to layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1 in this order. In addition, the example which implement | achieves setting of a priority is not restricted to this, For example, you may make it assign the value which shows a priority to each layer. In this case, the production control CPU 120 first refers to the values assigned to all the layers in which the control data is set (even if the control data is set in a plurality of layers). Therefore, the control data set in the layer to which the highest priority value (for example, the maximum value) is assigned is output to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F.

  Thus, since the priority order is set for the layers, only one LED effect is performed in the LED effect and a plurality of LED effects are not performed at the same time, but the sound effect corresponding to the LED effect is simultaneously performed. It may be done. For example, when control data for BGM effect is set in the control data area of layer 1 and control data for another effect is not set in the control data area of a layer having a higher priority than layer 1, BGM BGM is performed as a sound effect along with the LED effect of the effect. In this state, for example, when control data for another effect is set in the control data area of layer 3, the LED effect for the BGM effect ends and the LED effect for another effect is performed in the LED effect. In sound effects, BGM and sound effects of other effects are performed simultaneously.

  When the control data is set in any one of the control data areas, the effect control CPU 120 emits (lights up) the LEDs 9a to 9e with a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set. , Blinking, etc.) Specifically, for example, when the gaming state is in the low base state, as shown in FIG. 42, when control data is set in layer 1, it corresponds to the BGM effect (normal variation, reach variation) of layer 1 Control is performed so that the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) with the light emission pattern. In addition, when control data is set to the layer 2, control is performed to cause the LEDs 9a to 9e to emit light (turn on, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice B effect of the layer 2. In addition, when control data is set to the layer 3, control is performed to cause the LEDs 9a to 9e to emit light (turn on, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect of the layer 3. When control data is set to the layer 4, control is performed to cause the LEDs 9 a to 9 e to emit light (turn on, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the finalized notification effect of the layer 4. If control data is set for layer 5, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light on, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of layer 5.

  When the gaming state is the high base state, as shown in FIG. 42, when control data is set in layer 1, the LED 9a has a light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (normal variation) of layer 1. Control is made to emit light (light, blink, etc.) to 9e. When control data is set to the layer 2, the LEDs 9 a to 9 e are controlled to emit light (turn on, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (reach change) of the layer 2. When control data is set for layer 3, control is performed so that LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice effect (all) of layer 3. When control data is set to the layer 4, control is performed to cause the LEDs 9 a to 9 e to emit light (turn on, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the finalized notification effect of the layer 4. If control data is set for layer 5, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light on, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of layer 5.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state is a big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 42, when control data is set to layer 1, LEDs 9a to 9 are displayed with a light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (big hit) of layer 1. 9e is controlled to emit light (turn on, blink, etc.). In addition, when control data is set to layer 2, control is performed to cause the LEDs 9a to 9e to emit light (light up, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice effect (hold hold, promotion) of layer 2. To do. When control data is set for layer 3, control is performed so that LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (light on, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the big prize winning prize effect of layer 3. Further, when control data is set in layer 4, control is performed so that the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the probability variation prize effect of layer 4. If control data is set for layer 5, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light on, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of layer 5.

  When the control data is set in both the control data areas, the effect control CPU 120 emits the LEDs 9a to 9e with the light emission patterns corresponding to the control data areas set with high priority (lights on, It can be controlled to blink). Specifically, for example, when control data is set in the control data areas of both layer 2 and layer 3, the light emission pattern corresponding to layer 3 which is the control data area to be set with high priority. The LEDs 9a to 9e can be controlled to emit light (turn on, blink, etc.). Further, when control data is set in the control data areas of layer 2, layer 3, and layer 4, the LED 9a has a light emission pattern corresponding to layer 4 that is a control data area set with a high priority. It is controllable to emit light (light, blink, etc.) to 9e.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a light emission pattern when control data is set in one control data area in the first gaming state, and one control in the second gaming state different from the first gaming state It differs from the light emission pattern when control data is set in the data area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the control data area is provided for each gaming state (low base state, high base state, big hit gaming state). Then, for example, in the low base state, for example, a high base state different from the low base state and the light emission pattern (light emission pattern corresponding to notice A effect) when the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2, for example The light emission pattern (the light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect) when the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 is different.

  The setting in the control data area shown in FIG. 42 is reset every time one game is finished in principle. “One game” means that when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the game starts from the start of the variable display and ends by the stop display of the variable display. The case shows the game from the start to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  Therefore, when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the control data is set at the start timing of the variable display or the start timing of the effect during the variable display, and is determined for each variable display stop display or each effect. It is reset when the specified time has elapsed. Even when the timing when the time set for each effect has passed does not come, the variable display is reset when it is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the gaming state is a big hit gaming state, the control data is set in the special chart waiting process of S173 or the big hit game processing of S176, etc., when the big hit is finished, when the round is finished, It is reset at the timing when the time determined for each performance has elapsed.

  Setting of LED effect control data by LEDs 9a to 9e corresponding to effects (for example, pre-reading notice effects and effects including multiple hits) that are performed across a plurality of games is reset by the end of the game It will not be done. In addition, the LED effect performed over a plurality of games is a combination of one game that differs depending on the game state described above as one game, and the effect over a plurality of one game is also an LED effect. Good.

  Next, each effect shown in FIG. 42 will be described. As described above, the LED control in this embodiment corresponds to the sound effects in the effects shown in FIG. In the following description, an LED that emits light (lights up, flashes, etc.) is described in each effect. However, when only the described LED emits light (lights up, flashes, etc.), other LEDs also emit light (light up, May blink).

  In FIG. 42, the error effect corresponds to the error designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100, and the error image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 5 and the error sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. , And an effect such as an error notification by an error light emitting operation or the like in the LEDs 9a to 9e. The error effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which all of the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (turn on, blink, etc.). Then, as shown in FIG. 42, when the control data is set in the control data area (layer 5) in which the highest priority is set, the effect control CPU 120 does not depend on the gaming state. Control is performed so that light is emitted (lighted, blinked, etc.) with a light emission pattern indicating an error effect.

  The confirmation notification effect is an effect in which LEDs arranged in a V-shape are blinked or a V-shaped symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, and the big hit performed during the variation of the effect pattern is This is an effect (notice) indicating confirmation.

  For example, in the probability variation prize production, a V probability variation type gaming machine in which the state after the big hit is determined by the presence / absence of a prize at a probability variation prize opening (or a predetermined area provided in the probability variation prize opening, hereinafter, a probability variation prize opening, etc.). The effect is given when a prize is won in a probability variation winning opening etc. Generally, when winning at a promising winning prize opening or the like, the state after the big hit is set as a probable change state. In this case, an effect is provided that allows the player to aim for winning in a probability variation prize opening or the like, and this effect is referred to as a probability variation challenge effect in this embodiment. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is not provided with a probability variation winning opening, in order to explain an example of the LED control, the probability variation winning effect in this embodiment is, for example, within the special variable winning prize ball device 7 The above-mentioned predetermined area is provided, and an LED (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7) emits light (turns on, blinks, etc.) when winning in the predetermined area. In this embodiment, the probability variation challenge effect is an effect in which an LED (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7) emits light (lights up, blinks, etc.). In addition, this odd variation winning prize mouth is also called the odd variation attacker.

  In this embodiment, the notice A effect and the notice B effect are effects in the display area of the effect display device 5 while the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.). Character A is an effect displayed in the display area of effect display device 5, and notice B effect is an effect in which character B is displayed in the display area of effect display device 5. Also, “pre notice (all)” indicates notice A effect and notice B effect. In addition, among “notice (holding ream, promotion)”, the notice (holding ream) has a big hit hold when there is a big hit hold in the hold held before or during the big hit. It is an effect that gives notice in a big hit. The advance (promotion) is the jackpot promotion effect described above or, for example, a round number promotion effect in which the number of jackpot rounds increases from 8 rounds to 16 rounds and the like. This “notice (holding continuation, promotion)” is an effect in the display area of the effect display device 5 while the LEDs 9 a to 9 e emit light (turn on, blink, etc.).

  The big winning opening prize effect is an effect performed when a prize is awarded to the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. The big winning opening winning effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) every time the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is won. In this grand prize opening prize production, there is a case where an effect that is particularly conspicuous at the time of so-called over-winning is performed.

  In each effect described above, not only an LED effect but also an effect other than the LED effect (for example, a sound effect by sound, a display effect by the effect display device 5, or an effect that combines the sound effect and the display effect). Although it may be performed, in the following description, "representation" indicates only LED rendition in the rendition unless otherwise specified. When showing the whole production including the LED production and the production other than the LED, it is expressed as “production (all)”. Moreover, when showing effects other than LED, it expresses as "effect (other than LED)." For example, “BGM effect” indicates only the LED effect, and “BGM effect (all)” indicates the entire effect including effects other than LED such as sound effect in addition to the LED effect, and “BGM effect (other than LED)”. "Indicates an effect other than the LED, such as a sound effect.

  Further, in each of the effects described above, the priority of BGM effects is set to the lowest in any game state due to the nature of BGM. In the low base state, the notice A effect has a higher priority than the notice B effect, because the notice A effect is an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice B effect. Further, in the low base state, the finalized notification effect has a higher priority than the advance A effect, which is because the finalized notification effect indicates that a big hit is determined.

  In the high base state, the BGM (reach variation) production has a higher priority than the BGM (normal) production, because the BGM (reach variation) production is a production with a higher expectation of jackpot than the BGM (normal) production. It is. In the high base state, the notice (all) effect has a higher priority than the BGM (reach fluctuation) effect, but this is because the notice (all) effect has a higher expectation of jackpot than the BGM (reach change) effect. It is. In the high base state, the confirmed notification effect has a higher priority than the notice (all) effect, which is because the confirmed notification effect is an effect having a higher degree of expectation than the notice (all) effect.

  In the jackpot game state, the notice (holding ream, promotion) production has a higher priority than the BGM (hit winning) production, but this is an effect that is more important to the player than the BGM (hit winning) production. It is because there is. In the big hit gaming state, the grand prize opening prize production has a higher priority than the notice (holding series, promotion) production, but this is performed every time a prize is won. Promotion) effect (other than LED) is generally an effect that is performed in the display area of the effect display device 5 for a relatively longer time than the prize winning prize winning effect. If the priority is set higher, the player can be notified of any effect, but if the priority is set higher than the prize winning effect, the advance notice (holding, promotion) This is because only the rendition (promotion, promotion) effect is performed, and the grand prize opening prize effect is not performed. In addition, as described above, in the big prize opening prize production, the production at the time of over-winning is generally performed, and the over-winning is a profit that is not originally obtained for the player, so the importance of the production is It is also because it is expensive.

  The setting of the control data of each effect is reset when the time set for each effect elapses, except for the control data for effects to be performed across BGM effects and a plurality of games. In addition, there is an effect (all) that branches into two or more effects (all) as an effect (all) in a general pachinko gaming machine. When branching to such a plurality of effects (all), the control data for the effect corresponding to the branching is reset.

  The control data set in each control data area described above is an example, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 42, but is set as appropriate according to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine.

  43 and 44 are time charts showing examples of LED control. First, in the time chart shown in FIG. 43, there is a start prize at time T1 when no error notification is executed, the gaming state is in a low base state, variable display is not performed, and there is no hold. The time chart when the effect design starts to change, the notice B effect occurs at time T2, and the notice A effect occurs at time T3 is shown. The BGM effect (other than LED) is performed from time T1 to the end, the notice B effect (other than LED) is performed from time T2 to the last, and the notice A effect (other than LED) is performed from time T3 to the end. It is Control object LED is made into LED9a-9e as an example.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 43, the vertical axis represents LED control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis represents time.

  Further, in FIG. 43, the control data set in the control data area of layer 5 is used as control data for error presentation, and the control data set in the control data area of layer 4 is used for control of final notification production. The control data set in the control data area of layer 3 is the control data for the notice A effect, and the control data set in the control data area of layer 2 is the control data for the notice B effect. The control data set in the control data area of layer 1 is used as control data for the BGM effect.

  The LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (colored, blinking, etc.) in color A in error production, light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in confirmation notification production, and light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color C in notice A production. In the notice B effect, light is emitted (lighted, blinked, etc.) in the color D, and in the BGM effect, light is emitted (lighted, blinked, etc.) in the color E.

  Moreover, in the time chart shown by FIG. 43, the display mode which shows the luminescent color etc. of LED9a-9e is shown. In this display mode, “off” indicates that the LEDs 9a to 9e are turned off, and the alphabet indicates that the corresponding color is emitted (lighted, blinked, etc.). The terms "erasing" and alphabetic expressions are also used in other time charts described below.

  Furthermore, in the time chart shown in FIG. 43, it is also shown whether or not effects (other than the LED) corresponding to each layer are being executed. For example, since the BGM effect (all) is an effect that executes a sound effect together with the LED effect, the sound effect can be executed even when the priority is low and the LED effect is not performed.

  Moreover, in the case of FIG. 43, each effect (other than LED) can be performed simultaneously. For example, the notice A effect (other than LED) and the notice B effect (other than LED) can be executed simultaneously.

  Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 43 will be described. First, since control data is not set in each control data area, the LEDs 9a to 9e are turned off as shown in the LED display mode.

  There is a start winning at time T1, and control data is set in the control data area of layer 1, whereby BGM LED control is turned on. As a result, as shown in the LED display mode, the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color E.

  Next, at time T2, the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 having a higher priority than layer 1, whereby the notice BLED control is turned on and the BGMLED control is turned off. As a result, as shown in the LED display mode, the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color D.

  Next, at time T3, the control data is set in the control data area of layer 3 having a higher priority than layer 2, whereby the notice ALED control is turned on and the notice BLED control is turned off. As a result, as shown in the LED display mode, the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color C. According to the control shown in FIG. 43, since the notice B effect important for the player is prioritized over the BGM effect, and the notice A effect more important than the notice B effect is prioritized, the player is notified by each LED effect Since the visual effect can be appropriately provided, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, in the time chart shown in FIG. 44, in the state where the gaming state is the low base state, the variable display is not performed, and there is no hold, there is a start prize at time T1, and the effect design starts to fluctuate. FIG. 43 shows a time chart in the case where the notification B effect is generated at time T2 and the notification A effect is generated at time T3 as in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, since the error notification is being executed, the error presentation (other than the LED) is being executed, and the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 5, thereby displaying the LED display mode. As shown in FIG. 4, the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (light on, blink, etc.) in color A. Then, since the control data for error notification set in layer 5 has the highest priority, it becomes time T1, time T2, time T3 and BGM effect, notice B effect, and notice A effect. Also, the error LED control is continued and the execution of the error presentation (other than the LED) is also continued.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the BGM effect (other than LED), the notice B effect (other than LED), and the notice A effect (other than LED) can be executed at the same time even during error notification.

  43 and 44 show an example of LED control when the gaming state is in the low base state, as an example, but there are also cases where the gaming state is in the high base state or the big hit gaming state. LED control is performed according to the priority order of the layers shown in FIG.

  45 and 46 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect execution setting process executed in the effect symbol variation start process (step S74). This flowchart will be described using the control data area shown in FIG. 42 as an example. Further, in the description of this flowchart, “to set the control data of effect Y in the control data area of layer N and set the LED control data of the effect control pattern according to the start timing of effect Y” is simply “to produce Y control data is set to layer N ”. For example, the description “setting the control data for the notice effect in layer 2” means that the control data for the notice effect is set in the control data area of layer 2 and the effect control pattern is set according to the start timing of the notice effect. It means “setting LED control data”.

  In the effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error LED is being emitted (for example, whether or not the LEDs 9a to 9e are emitting light (lighted, blinking, etc.) in color A). The operation is performed (step S901). The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error notification processing in step S54A has been executed.

  If the error LED is being emitted (step S901; Yes), since the error effect has the highest priority, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S915 without setting the control data in the lower layer.

  If the error LED is being emitted (step S901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the high base state (step S902). If the gaming state is the high base state (step S902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S903). If the fluctuation pattern is the reach fluctuation pattern (step S903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets control data for BGM (reach fluctuation) effect in the layer 2 (step S904), and the process proceeds to step S906. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S903; NO), the production control CPU 120 sets the control data for the BGM (normal variation) production in the layer 1 (step S905), and proceeds to step S906.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice determination process for determining whether to execute the notice effect (step S906). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect from the decision result of the notice determination process (step S907). When the notice effect is not executed (step S907; No), the process proceeds to step S909. When the advance notice effect is to be executed (step S 907; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets control data for the advance notice effect in the layer 3 (step S 908).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a confirmation notification determination process for determining whether to execute a confirmation notification effect (step S909). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the confirmation notification effect from the determination result of the determination notification determination process (step S910). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (step S910; No), the process proceeds to step S912. If the finalized notification effect is to be executed (step S 910; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets control data for the finalized notification effect in the layer 4 (step S 911). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects each effect control pattern determined in each determination process (step S912). Then, the effect execution setting process ends.

  Returning to the process of step S902, if the gaming state is the low base state (step S902; No), the process proceeds to step S913 of FIG. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (step S913). If the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (step S913; Yes), the production control CPU 120 sets control data for BGM (reach variation) production in layer 1 (step S914), and proceeds to step S916. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S913; NO), the production control CPU 120 sets the BGM (normal variation) production control data in the layer 1 (step S915), and proceeds to step S916.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice B determination process for determining whether to execute the notice B effect (step S916). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice B effect from the decision result of the notice B decision process (step S917). When the notice B effect is not executed (step S917; No), the process proceeds to step S919. When the advance notice B effect is to be executed (step S 917; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets control data for the advance notice B effect in the layer 2 (step S 918).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 120 performs advance notice A determination processing for determining whether to execute the advance notice A effect (step S919). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice A effect from the decision result of the notice A decision process (step S920). When the notice A effect is not executed (step S920; No), the process proceeds to step S922. When executing the notice A effect (step S920; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets control data for the notice A effect in the layer 3 (step S921).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a confirmation notification determination process for determining whether to execute a confirmation notification effect (step S922). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the confirmation notification effect from the determination result of the confirmation notification determination process (step S923). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (step S923; No), the process proceeds to step S912. When executing the confirmation notification effect (step S923; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets control data for the confirmation notification effect in the layer 4 (step S924).

  In addition to the control of the LEDs 9a to 9e in the effect symbol change start process described above, the control of the LEDs 9a to 9e is performed also in the change pattern command reception waiting process, the effect symbol change process, and the big hit game process. For example, in the variation pattern command reception waiting process, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 immediately displays the LEDs 9a to 9e in the LED mode in the customer waiting demonstration effect. . On the other hand, when the BGM effect is an effect that repeats a certain pattern, the effect control CPU 120 displays the LEDs 9a to 9e in the LED mode of the customer waiting demonstration effect several seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Thus, even when the same customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the control contents differ depending on the situation.

  In addition, during the production design fluctuation processing, the CPU for production control 120 controls the LEDs 9a to 9e based on the start timing set in the production design fluctuation start processing, and determines whether the time set for each production passes, When the variable display ends, the setting of control data of the effect is reset. Further, in the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 120 may control the LEDs 9a to 9e in accordance with the player's operation. As an operation example of the player, there is, for example, an operation of pressing a trigger button of the stick controller 31A. In response to such a pressing operation, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LEDs 9a to 9e in the effect symbol variation processing. In the big hit game processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets each control data shown in FIG. 42 in the control data area to control the LEDs 9a to 9e, and the time set for each effect has elapsed. Then, the setting of the control data for the effect is reset. In addition, since the LEDs 9a to 9e may be controlled in response to the player's operation during the big hit game processing, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LEDs 9a to 9e in accordance with the pressing operation.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the data setting area (in this example, the control shown in FIG. 42) has a plurality of layers (in this example, layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 42) to which the priority is set. Data area). Further, light emission data for performing light emission control of at least light emitters (LEDs 9a to 9e in this example) of the electrical components can be set in each layer of the data setting area. The control means (in this example, the effect control CPU 120) can perform light emission control of the light emitter based on the light emission data, and the light emission data is set in a plurality of layers in the data setting area. In addition, the light emission control of the light emitter is performed based on the light emission data set in the higher priority layer. Therefore, it is possible to perform light emission control of the light emitter by simply switching the priority order by switching layers.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, a BGM effect, a notice effect, a confirmation notification effect, a big prize opening prize effect, a probability change prize effect, an error effect, etc.) are executed. A light emitting device (for example, LEDs 9a to 9e) that can emit light with a color pattern, a blinking pattern, and the like, and a control unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that can control the light emitting device. When the control data is set in the control data area, it is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light with a predetermined light emission pattern. The control data area is one control data area (for example, the layer of FIG. 42). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5) And at least one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, etc.) of the control data areas, including at least a control data area different from one control data area). When the control data is set in any one of the control data areas of the layer 5), a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, The BGM effect, the notice effect, the confirmation notification effect, the grand prize opening prize effect, the probability variation prize effect, the light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect, etc.) are controlled to emit light, and both control data areas (for example, If control data is set in two control data areas of the layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 control data areas), the priority order The light emitting device can be controlled to emit light with a light emission pattern corresponding to a control data area in which the layers 1 to 3 are set high (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 4, layer 5, etc. in descending order of priority) In the first gaming state (for example, the low base state of FIG. 42), the control data (for example, the low base state layer 2 control data region of FIG. 42, etc.) is controlled. 42, the light emission pattern when the control data for the notice B effect set in the control data area of the layer 2 in the low base state in FIG. 42 is set, and the second gaming state different from the first gaming state (For example, control data in one control data area in high base state of FIG. 42) (for example, control data for BGM effect set in control data area of layer 2 in high base state of FIG. 42) The light emission pattern when is set is different. Therefore, since the lamp effects can be performed in the priority order according to the game state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, a BGM effect, a notice effect, a confirmation notification effect, a big prize opening prize effect, a probability change prize effect, an error effect, etc.) are executed. A light emitting device (for example, LEDs 9a to 9e) that can emit light with a color pattern, a blinking pattern, and the like, and a control unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that can control the light emitting device. When the control data is set in the control data area, it is possible to control the light emitting device to emit light with a predetermined light emission pattern. The control data area is one control data area (for example, the layer of FIG. 42). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5) And at least one control data area (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, etc.) of the control data areas, including at least a control data area different from one control data area). When the control data is set in any one of the control data areas of the layer 5), a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set (for example, The BGM effect, the notice effect, the confirmation notification effect, the grand prize opening prize effect, the probability variation prize effect, the light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect, etc.) are controlled to emit light, and both control data areas (for example, If control data is set in two control data areas of the layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 control data areas), the priority order The light emitting device can be controlled to emit light with a light emission pattern corresponding to a control data area in which the layers 1 to 3 are set high (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 4, layer 5, etc. in descending order of priority) In the control data area, the first data area (for example, the control data area for layer 1), the second data area (for example, the control data area for layer 2), 3 data areas (for example, a control data area for layer 3) are provided, and control data for controlling the light emitting device to emit light (for example, special data) is set as the control data set in the second data area. There are control data for controlling the light emission of the LED provided in the variable winning ball device 7 and the like, and light-off control data for controlling the light-emitting device to extinguish the light, and the first data area When control data (for example, control data for BGM effects) is set in the second data area, the light-off control data is set in the second data area, and when the light-off control data is set, Control data (for example, control data for winning prize winning effect) can be set in the three data areas. Therefore, since the light emission pattern with high priority can be made to stand out, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The description of the effects shown in FIGS. 43 to 46 is an example, and the effects shown in this embodiment may be applied to the game states other than those shown in FIGS. 43 to 46. Specifically, for example, the gaming state shown in FIG. 43 is a low base state, but may be applied to a big hit gaming state.

  Further, although the effects in the control of the LEDs 9a to 9e are described as sound effects, the effects are not limited to sound effects, and effects to be executed in the effect display device 5, effects for operating a feature, or the like may be used. Although the number of layers is five, the number of layers may be two or more. Furthermore, although the setting data area is provided for each of the low base state, the high base state, and the big hit gaming state, it is not limited to this, and is provided for each state such as the low probability high base state, high probability high base state, etc. You may do so.

  As the control data set in the control data area described above, the control data output to the lamp control board 14 is taken as an example, but the address of the data indicating the light emission pattern or 1-bit data indicating on / off, etc. It may be

  When the address of data indicating a light emission pattern is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the address set in the control data area and ramps the control data stored in the address. When the data is output to the control board 14 and the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set.

  When 1-bit data indicating on / off is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the control data area when “1” indicating on is set in the control data area. Control data indicating a light emission pattern of the effect to be output is output to the lamp control board 14, and when "0" indicating OFF is set in the control data area, it is determined that the control data is not set. Therefore, when "0" is set, the control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect corresponding to the control data area is not output to the lamp control board 14, so that the lamp 9 is not emitted in the light emission pattern. It becomes.

  Further, as the light emission pattern of the lamp, although the embodiment according to the difference in color has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a blinking pattern or the like having different light emission intervals may be used. Furthermore, specific examples of colors A, B, C, D, and E include blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow, but they may emit light in a plurality of colors.

  Further, in this embodiment, the control means sets control data in the control data area (eg, the control data area of layer 5 in FIG. 42, etc.) to which the highest priority is set. Is controlled to emit light with a light emission pattern indicating an error regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, an error can be notified appropriately.

  Further, in this embodiment, first control data (for example, control data for notice A effect of FIG. 42) for causing the light emitting device to emit light with the first light emission pattern when it is set in the control data area; There is second control data for causing the light emitting device to emit light in the second light emission pattern when set in the control data area, and in one gaming state (for example, the low base state in FIG. 42, etc.) One control data (for example, control data for the notice A effect set in layer 3 in FIG. 42) is second control data (for example, control data for the notice B effect set in layer 2 in FIG. 42). The first control data (for example, FIG. 42 (for example, FIG. 42 (B)) in a game state (for example, the high base state in FIG. B) Layer 2 The control data for the preview A effect) is in a control data area having a lower priority than the second control data (for example, the control data for the preview B effect set in layer 3 in FIG. 42B). Is set. Therefore, since the lamp effects can be performed in the priority order according to the game state, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified Example of Movable Part Drive Mechanism]
Next, a modification of the movable portion drive mechanism will be described. FIG. 47: (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as a modification 1 of a movable part drive mechanism. FIG. 48: (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as a modification 2 of a movable part drive mechanism. FIG. 49: (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as a modification 3 of a movable part drive mechanism. 50A is an explanatory view showing a restricting portion as a fourth modification of the movable portion drive mechanism, and FIG. 50B is a explanatory view showing a restricting portion as a fifth modification of the movable portion drive mechanism.

  In the embodiment, the pinion gear 331 is applied as an example of the drive gear, and the rack gear 322 is applied as an example of the driven gear. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the drive gear and the driven gear are not limited thereto. The type of can be changed variously.

  For example, as in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 47, both the drive gear G1 and the driven gear G2 are rotating gears, and as shown in FIGS. 47 (A) to (D), the drive gear G1 is moved in the first operation direction. By rotating, the driven tooth 410 is brought into contact with the tip surface 402 of the driving tooth 400 adjacent to the missing portion 401 among the plurality of driving teeth, and the movement state of the driven gear G2 in the second direction is restricted. can do.

  Thus, a rotary gear may be applied as the driven gear. In the above embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C that meshes with the drive tooth 340C as the adjacent drive tooth is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the other driven teeth 350B and 350C. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 410 meshing with the drive tooth 400 as the adjacent drive tooth is greater than the tooth thickness dimensions L11, 12 of the other driven teeth. May not be long.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 48, with the drive gear G3 as the rack gear and the driven gear G4 as the rotary gear as shown in FIG. 48, and as shown in FIGS. 48 (A) to (D), the drive gear G3 is in the first operating direction. By moving, the driven tooth 410 of the driving tooth 400 adjacent to the missing portion 401 among the plurality of driving teeth is brought into contact with the driven tooth 410, and a controlled state in which the movement of the driven gear G4 in the second direction is restricted. be able to. Thus, a rack gear may be applied as the drive gear.

  In the embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive tooth 340C as the adjacent drive tooth having the tip surface 342C as the restricting portion is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 340A and 340B. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness L3 of the drive tooth 340C is longer than the tooth thicknesses L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 340A and 340B. You do not have to.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49, the drive gear G5 is a rotating gear, the driven gear G6 is a rack gear, and as shown in FIGS. 49 (A) to 49 (D), the drive gear G5 is a first gear. By moving in the actuating direction, the driven tooth 410 abuts on the tip surface 402 of the drive tooth 400 adjacent to the dropout portion 401 among the plurality of drive teeth, and movement of the driven gear G6 in the second direction is restricted. It can be in a regulated state. Thus, the circumferential length of the tip surface 402 of the driving tooth 400 as the adjacent driving tooth does not necessarily have to be longer than the circumferential length of the tip surface of the other driving teeth. As shown in FIG. 49 (D), when the tip surface 402 crosses the tooth tip line T, it is substantially the same as or short in the circumferential length of the tip surface of the other drive teeth. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tip end surface 342C as the restricting portion is a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a, but the movable portion drive mechanism is not limited to this, for example Further, it may be constituted by a flat surface, a spherical surface or a concave surface. Further, as shown in Modification 4 of FIG. 50 (A), by forming a locking recess 420 or the like that can lock the driven tooth 350C on a part of the tip surface or in the entire tip surface, the driven tooth 350C is formed. Even if it slips on the tip end surface 342C, the tip of the driven tooth 350C is easily bitten by being locked in the locking recess 420, so the driven tooth 350C slips on the tip end surface 342C as a restricting portion to be in a restricted state. It can suppress becoming difficult to change.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the tip end surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C adjacent to the dropout portion 341 is applied as an example of the control portion, but the movable portion drive mechanism is not limited to this. Is not limited to that constituted by the tip surface of the drive tooth, and as shown in Modification 5 of FIG. 50 (B), the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C and a missing portion from the tip surface 342C. It is good also as a control surface comprised by the extended surface 430 extended to the 341 side. That is, the restricting portion is not only formed by the tip surface of the drive tooth, but may be configured at a portion that does not function as the drive tooth, such as an extended surface extending from the tip surface to the missing portion side. Good.

  Further, the length dimension in the operation direction of the regulating surface composed of the front end surface 342C and the extending surface 430 constituting the regulating portion is not limited to those described in the above-described embodiment and modification examples. A regulating surface such as the installation surface 430 may be extended along the longitudinal direction of the missing portion 341.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment and the modifications 1-4, the drive gear had the missing part which the drive tooth missing on the back side of the 1st operation direction of the adjacent drive tooth, but a missing part is a drive tooth. Are not present, for example, a gear in which drive teeth are formed only in the arc of a fan-shaped gear, a rack gear in which adjacent drive teeth are formed on the rear end in the first working direction, etc. Will have.

  Also in the driven gear, there is a missing portion where the driven teeth are missing on the rear side in the first direction. For example, a gear in which the driven teeth are formed only in the arc of a fan-like gear, or an adjacent drive tooth A rack gear or the like in which a driven tooth meshing with the rear end is formed at the rear end in the first direction also has a dropout.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the rack gear and the pinion gear are applied as the type of drive gear and driven gear, but the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and spur gears, bevel gears and helical gears etc. May apply.

  In the embodiment, the pinion gear 331 fixed to the drive shaft 330a of the second effect motor 330 is used as a drive gear, and the rack gear 322 integrated with the movable member 321 is used as a driven gear. The partial drive mechanism is not limited to this, and it is only necessary that two gears meshed with each other among the plurality of gears driven by the drive source are the drive gear and the driven gear. For example, a gear that directly or indirectly meshes with the pinion gear 331 may be a drive gear, and a gear that meshes with the drive gear may be a driven gear. Further, the movable member 321 may not be directly provided to the rack gear 322 which is a driven gear, and for example, the movable member 321 may be provided to a part of a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the rack gear 322.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the drive gear and the driven gear were applied as a drive mechanism which moves the movable member 321 between the 1st position and the 2nd position with respect to the rotation member 320, to this, For example, the drive gear and the driven gear of the present invention may be applied as a drive mechanism for driving the movable portion 302 between the tilt position and the upright position, or other movable You may apply as a drive mechanism of an effect unit. In addition to those that are applied to the drive mechanism that drives the movable part for production in this way, for example, a drive mechanism that opens and closes the door for the special prize winning device 7 and the like, etc. You may apply as a drive mechanism of a part.

[Example of production using movable members]
Next, an effect example using the movable member 321 will be described. FIG. 51 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 5 when the battle reach effect is executed. FIG. 52 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 5 when the story reach effect is performed.

  The battle reach effect and the story reach effect are executed by the effect control CPU 120. The battle reach effect and the story reach effect are a plurality of special reach effects (super It is a specific super reach effect included in the reach effect). Furthermore, in these super reach productions, the jackpot expectation is set, for example, as a relationship of battle reach production <story reach production. Note that the expectation of jackpot between the battle reach production and the story reach production may be reversed.

  Each of the battle reach effect and the story reach effect is an effect in which the effect display by the image display of the effect display device 5 and the effect operation of the movable member 321 are combined.

  The battle reach effect shown in FIG. 51 will be described. In the variation display of the production symbols, the variation display of the production symbols is started all at once in each of the presentation symbols display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right", for example, "left" and "right" In accordance with the predetermined stop order such as “in”, the variable display of the production symbols is sequentially stopped in the production symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C, and finally the production symbols are stopped in all the production symbol display areas. When the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

  After the variation display of the production design is started at the same time, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), when the same design is stopped at the stage where the production design display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right" stop, reach It becomes a state. The variation display until the timing of reaching the reach state is executed in a normal variation display effect mode that does not differ between normal reach and super reach. The normal reach and the super reach differ in the production mode after reaching the reach state.

  When a battle reach effect is executed as a reach effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are reduced. In a small symbol display format, it is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 53 indicating “battle reach” is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is informed that battle reach production is performed.

  In the battle reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 51C to 51E, a moving image in which an ally character 61 (a player's side) and an enemy character 62 (a player's side) fight (battle) A battle effect that displays an image (effect including the output of the sound effect during the battle and the music sound during the battle) is executed.

  In the battle reach effect, when the variation display result is a big hit display result, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), a victory effect image display in which the teammate character 61 wins is displayed, and further, as shown in FIGS. 51 (D) and (E). As shown, an image in which the particle effect image 71 is superimposed and displayed on the victory effect image is displayed, and the movable member 321 operates at the upright position, and the victory effect appearing in front of the display area of the effect display device 5 is executed. Be done.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the variation display result is an out display result, a defeat effect of displaying an image in which the ally character 61 loses is displayed, and a particle effect image 71 as shown in FIGS. 51 (D) and (E). And the effect using the movable member 321 is not performed.

  Specifically, in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), after the display in which the teammate character 61 and the enemy character 62 appear is made, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the teammate character 61 and the enemy character are shown. A moving image in which the player battles with the player 62 is displayed. For example, FIG. 51D shows a scene in which the teammate character 61 attacks the enemy character 62. As shown in FIG. 51 (D), in a scene where the ally character 61 attacks in a battle effect (a scene suggesting victory), a particle effect image as a effect effect display in the lower center area of the screen of the effect display device 5 71 is made to appear and a particle effect effect is displayed in a superimposed manner on the victory effect display. When the ally character 61 wins, as shown in FIG. 51E, a victory effect is performed in which an image capable of specifying that the ally character 61 defeats the enemy character 62 and that the ally character 61 has won is displayed. Be done. In the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the movable member operation effect that appears in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 5 by moving the movable member 321 to the standing position. Be done. And the movable member 321 which appeared is made to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (E), when the movable member 321 appears and moves to the upright position due to the movable body operation effect, the number of appearance display of the particle effect image 71 to be superimposed and displayed increases around the movable member 321. Thus, a moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the particle effect image 71 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect performed using the particle effect image 71 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 321, and is called an operation effect effect. By such an operation effect effect, an effect in which the operation mode of the movable member 321 and the display mode of the particle effect image 71 are associated is performed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (F), the message image 55 in which the big hit display result (the same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect pattern displayed in the small symbol form, and the character "Congratulations" is shown , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is notified that the player has won the battle reach effect (having a big hit). After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (G), the effect symbol in which the big hit display result is displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. A stop symbol effect is displayed in which a message image 74 showing the word “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the variable display result becomes the disappointing display result, the above-mentioned defeating effect is executed, and the outright displaying result is derived and displayed in the effect pattern displayed in the small symbol form. The original size and position will be restored and displayed.

  Next, the story reach effect shown in FIG. 52 will be described. After the variation display of the production symbols is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), after the presentation symbols display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right" stop and reach the reach state, reach production When the story reach effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are reduced. The small symbol display format is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 54A in which the characters "first half of story" are shown is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is notified that the story reach effect is executed.

  Story reach presentation is presentation in which a moving image (story moving image) having a story characteristic such as a specific story is displayed. In this example, the story reach production has a two-part configuration of a first half and a second half. In the story reach effect, when the story is not completed, the effect is ended halfway and the out-of-display result is derived and displayed, and the story continues to the end, the effect is completed and the big-hit display result is derived and displayed There is.

  When the variation display result is an out-of-display result, the effect that the story reach effect ends in the first half is executed, and when the change display result is the big hit display result, the story reach effect continues from the first half to the second half An effect that continues until the time may be executed.

  In addition, in the story reach effect, the effect may be set so that the expectation of the big hit is higher when the effect is performed to the end than when the effect is ended in the first half. . Further, the story reach production may be a one-part configuration that is not divided into a first half and a second half.

  After the message image 54A is displayed, a moving image developed in accordance with the story corresponding to the “first half of the story” is displayed. When “the first half of the story” is completed and “the second half of the story” is subsequently executed, as shown in FIG. 52C, a message image 54B in which the text “the second half of the story” is displayed is displayed in the center of the screen. The Thereby, it is notified that the story reach production is continuously executed. In the story reach effect, an image notifying that it is a story reach effect such as message images 54A and 54B may not be displayed.

  After the message image 54B is displayed, a moving image developed according to the story corresponding to the “second half of the story” is displayed. In the story reach effect, when the variation display result is a big hit display result, the flame effect image 73 is superimposedly displayed on the black image 72 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 52E, the movable member 321 moves to the standing position, and the story completion effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variation display result is an out display result, a story incomplete effect which makes it possible to identify that the story is not completed is performed, and a black image 72 as shown in FIGS. 52 (D) and (E). The effect using the flame effect image 73 and the movable member 321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), the entire display area of the effect display device 5 is changed to a black image 72 and the area at the lower center of the screen of the effect display device 5 An effect of superimposing and displaying the flame effect image 73 as an effect display on the black image 72 is performed. In the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 52 (E), the movable body operation effect that appears in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 5 by moving the movable member 321 to the standing position. Will be And the movable member 321 which appeared is made to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 52E, when the movable member 321 appears and moves to the upright position due to the effect of the movable body movement, the flame of the flame effect image 73 to be superimposed and displayed becomes large around the movable member 321. A moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the effect image 73 is enlarged is displayed. The moving image is an effect executed using the flame effect image 73 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 321, and is called an operation effect effect as in the case of FIG. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 321 and the display mode of the flame effect image 73 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (F), the message image 55 in which the big hit display result (the same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect pattern displayed in the small symbol form, and the character "Congratulations" is shown , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is notified that the story reach production is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (G), the effect symbol in which the big hit display result is displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. A stop symbol effect is displayed in which a message image 74 showing the word “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol.

  In the story reach effect, the effect image is displayed as in the battle reach effect, but unlike the battle reach effect, the entire display area of the effect display device 5 is a black image, and the effect image is superimposed on the black image. Thus, the effect image can be displayed with further emphasis, and an image display having a higher effect than the battle reach effect can be executed. Thereby, the precious feeling (premiere feeling) of the story reach production in which the expectation degree to the big hit is set higher than the battle reach production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variation display result becomes the disappointing display result, the above-described story incomplete presentation effect is executed, and the disappointing display result is derived and displayed in the effect pattern displayed in the small symbol form. Will return to the original size and position and be displayed.

  In addition, the movable member 321 may be configured to be able to rotate by a drive unit such as a motor whose drive control is performed by the effect control CPU 120. In the case where the disk-shaped portion of the movable member 321 is configured to be capable of rotation control, the movable member 321 moves to the upright position as shown in FIG. When appearing or appearing in front of the display area of the device 5, control may be made to rotate the discoid portion. In that case, the effect display device 5 displays an image for operating an effect image such as the particle effect image 71 of FIG. 51 (E) and the flame effect image 73 of FIG. 52 (E) in accordance with the rotational movement of the movable member 321. The effect control to be displayed may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect obtained by using the movable member 321 and the effect image.

  In addition, the movable member 321 is not limited to a rotating operation, and a part or all of the constituent members perform a deformation operation such as opening and closing or contracting by a driving unit such as a solenoid that is driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 120. In the case of such a configuration, a display on the effect display device 5 is performed in accordance with the deformation operation of the movable member located in front of the display area of the effect display device 5 in a specific effect scene. Effect control for displaying an image for operating the effect image to be performed may be executed.

  Next, a control example of effect effects and movable body effects in specific super reach effects such as battle reach effects and story reach effects will be described using timing charts.

  FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing an example of control of effect effects and movable object effects in a specific super reach effect. FIG. 53 (A) shows an example of control of effect presentation and movable object presentation in battle reach presentation as shown in FIG. FIG. 53 (B) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 53 (A), a control example of an effect effect and a movable object effect in the battle reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When a battle reach effect is executed, the effect pattern is displayed in the normal change display mode as shown in FIG. 51 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect pattern (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

  In the effect display device 5, when the reach state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 51 (B) and (C), the message image 53 is displayed, and a moving image such as a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed Is done. The timing at which the image display of the battle effect is changed to the image display of the victory effect as shown in FIGS. 51 (D) and (E) in the effect display device 5 is the turning point of the first change of the image regarding the battle reach effect It is time to become a cut of the video cut). At the timing (first video change node) of the first video change regarding such a battle reach effect, the particle effect image is displayed on the battle effect image as shown in FIGS. 51 (D) and (E). This is executed in such a manner that a particle effect effect in which an image on which 71 is superimposed is displayed on the effect display device 5 and a movable body operation effect for operating the movable member 321 are linked.

  The timing at which the movable member 321 moves to the standing position as shown in FIGS. 51E and 51F in the effect display device 5 and changes from the image display of the victory effect to the image display of the reach result effect is battle reach. This is a time when the second change of the video related to the production (video cut break). At the timing (second video change node) at the turning point of the second video change related to such battle reach effect, the particle effect image 71 is superimposed on the image of the win effect as shown in FIG. 51 (E). Operation effect effects such as an image to be displayed are executed in the effect display device 5.

  Then, when the operation effect effect and the movable body operation effect are finished, the reach result is notified by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the reach result effect is completed, a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 51 (G) is executed in the effect display device 5, whereby a display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol is performed and a variable display is performed. finish.

  As described above, in the battle reach effect, the effect effect display in which the particle effect image 71 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 72 is executed at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect. Furthermore, in the battle reach effect, at a timing when a change in the image related to reach effect is reached, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 321 and the effect effect display are linked is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53 (B), a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the story reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When the story reach effect is executed, the effect pattern is displayed in the normal change display mode as shown in FIG. 52A from the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) to the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

  In the effect display device 5, when the reach state occurs, the message images 54A and 54B are displayed as shown in FIGS. 52 (B) and (C), and the moving image such as a story moving image corresponding to the story reach effect The image is displayed. The timing of changing from the image display of the story effect to the image display of the story completion effect as shown in FIGS. 52 (D) and 52 (E) in the effect display device 5 is the turning point of the first change of the image regarding the story reach effect. It is time to be (the cut of the video cut). At the timing (first video change node) of the first video change relating to such story reach production, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 72 as shown in FIGS. 52 (D) and 52 (E). This is executed in a manner in which a flame effect effect in which an image displaying 73 is superimposed on the effect display device 5 and a movable body operation effect for operating the movable member 321 are linked.

  As shown in FIGS. 52E and 52F in the effect display device 5, the timing when the movable member 321 moves to the upright position and the image display of the story completion effect is changed to the image display of the reach result effect is the story This is the time when the second change in the video related to the reach production will be a turning point (video cut break). At the timing (second video change node) at the turning point of the second video change related to such story reach effect, the flame effect image 73 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 72 as shown in FIG. 52 (E). The effect display device 5 executes an operation effect effect such as an image to be displayed.

  Then, when the operation effect effect and the movable body operation effect are finished, the reach result is displayed by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. 52 (F) in the effect display device 5. Thereafter, when the reach result effect is completed, a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 52 (G) is executed on the effect display device 5, thereby performing a display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol and a variable display. finish.

  Thus, in the story reach effect, the effect effect display is performed such that the flame effect image 73 is superimposed on the black image 72 at the timing of the change in the video related to the reach effect. Furthermore, in the story reach effect, an effect in which a movable body effect such as the movable member 321 and an effect effect display are linked is performed at the timing of the turning point of the change in the image regarding the reach effect.

  Specifically, the battle reach effects shown in FIGS. 51 and 53A and the story reach effects shown in FIGS. 52 and 53B are specifically executed by the effect control CPU 120 as follows. Is realized by

  When, as a variation pattern command (variation pattern specification command), among the variation pattern commands of super reach, a variation pattern command in which a variation pattern of super reach of a type for executing battle reach effect is designated is received in effect control board 12 The effect control CPU 120 controls the image display of the effect display device 5 that performs battle reach effect and the operation control of the movable member 321 as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 53 (A) in the effect symbol variation start process (S74). The effect control data (process data etc.) for performing the process is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 122. The battle reach effect is partially different between when the fluctuation display result becomes a jackpot display result and when it becomes an outlier display result, so when a fluctuation pattern command or display result designation command that can identify the fluctuation display result is received In addition, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received command content to recognize the change display result, and selects the effect control data according to the change display result. Then, the CPU for effect control 120 starts the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, and in the effect symbol fluctuation process (S75), using the effect control data set to execute the battle reach effect, the movable body effect process and the effect By executing the effect display process or the like, the image display control of the effect display device 5 and the operation control of the movable member 321 are performed, and the battle reach effect as shown in FIGS. 51 and 53A is executed.

  When, as a variation pattern command (variation pattern specification command), among the variation pattern commands of super reach, a variation pattern command in which a variation pattern of super reach of a type for executing story reach effect is designated is received in effect control board 12 The effect control CPU 120 controls the image display of the effect display device 5 that performs the story reach effect and the operation control of the movable member 321 as shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 (B) in the effect symbol variation start process (S74). The effect control data (process data, etc.) for performing is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 122. The story reach effect is partially different when the variation display result is a big hit display result and when it is an off display result, so when receiving a variation pattern command or display result specification command that can identify the variation display result In addition, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received command content to recognize the change display result, and selects the effect control data according to the change display result. Then, the CPU for effect control 120 starts the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, and in the effect symbol fluctuation process (S75), using the effect control data set to execute the story reach effect, the movable object effect process and the effect By executing the effect display processing or the like, the image display control of the effect display device 5 and the operation control of the movable member 321 are performed, and the story reach effect as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53B is executed.

  When a movable body effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect display, such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 51 and 53A and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 52 and 53B. Depending on which kind of effect display is performed, such as an effect effect display of an aspect in which an effect image is superimposed and displayed on a black image, and an effect effect display of an aspect in which an effect image is superimposed and displayed on an effect image Since the effect effect display in a different mode can be displayed, it is possible to enhance the effect that links the operation of the movable body and the effect display of the display means.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 51 (E) and 53 (A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect is performed in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 321 is executed. It is possible to execute an effect that superimposes the effect effect display of a specific aspect such as the particle effect image 71 of FIGS. 51D and 51E on a specific type of effect display such as the display of a victory effect image. Therefore, it becomes possible to link the effect display of the specific type in which the movable body effect is executed and the effect effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5, and the operation of the movable body by the effect display of the specific type And the effect of displaying the effect of the display means can be further enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 52E and 53B, a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect in which a movable object effect that operates a movable object such as the movable member 321 is executed is executed. 52D and 52E, a specific effect display effect such as the flame effect image 73 shown in FIGS. 52D and 52E is changed to a predetermined image displayed in the entire display area of the display display device 5 such as the black image 72. Since the effect of superimposing display can be executed, it is possible to link the predetermined effect of the predetermined type in which the movable body effect is executed and the effect effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5. Thus, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game by emphasizing the movable body effect.

  In addition, the production which makes a movable body and production effect display cooperate (linkage) like battle reach production and story reach production which were mentioned above may be performed in reach production other than super reach, and is performed in production other than reach production You may

  Also, as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display has been described as an example executed at the timing of the turning point of the change in the image regarding the effect The present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed at a timing other than the timing of the turning point of the change of the image regarding the effect such as the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the execution of the effect.

  Although the particle effect image and the flame effect image have been described as an example as the effect effect display in the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, Not limited to this, as the effect display, other types of effect display such as an effect image in the form of light emission may be used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, among the two types of effect display of battle reach effect and story reach effect, it is possible to display effect effects of different modes depending on which effect display is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display different types of effect display according to which of the three or more types of effect display is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, among a plurality of effect displays such as battle reach effects and story reach effects, effect effects of different modes are displayed depending on which effect display is performed. The example in which the effect effect display mode is changed depending on whether the black image 72 is displayed or not is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of changing the effect effect display mode, any type of effect display displays a black image, but the effect effect display type such as an effect image may be different. In this case, the effect effect display types may be different as long as any of the effect effect display components such as the shape, color, display range, and luminance of the effect effect display image is different.

  Further, as effects for linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, images of the effect effect display as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 are displayed first Not only the effect of moving the movable body later, but also the effect of executing the image display of the effect effect display and the operation of the movable body at the same timing, and the image of the effect effect display after operating the movable body first An effect of displaying may be used.

  Moreover, as an effect which uses the black image 72 like the story reach effect mentioned above, the example which displays the black image 72 on the whole display area of the effect display apparatus 5 was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, control may be performed to display the black image 72 in a part of the display area in the effect display device 5 such as an area for displaying the effect image.

  In addition, as an effect of linking a movable body such as the movable member described above and a rendering effect display such as an effect image, the movable body is operated in each of a plurality of types of rendering display different in the situation of the rendering display. When performing an effect, an effect may be executed in which an effect image display as a different type of effect display is displayed in association with the operation of the movable body, depending on the state of the effect display for operating the movable body. Good. For example, different types of effect image display may be executed in the following effects display situation. (A) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body before entering the reach state during the variation display of the effect symbol. (B) When displaying an effect image corresponding to operating the movable body at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous. (C) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during execution of normal reach. (D) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the execution of the super reach effect. (E) When an effect image display is displayed in response to operating the movable body at the time of the development of the production during the execution of the super-reach of the development production format in which the production content develops. (F) Corresponds to operating the movable body when the lottery effect (for example, an effect such as lottery for deciding whether to be a big hit or a non big hit) is made again after notifying that the big hit display result is reached. To display the effect image display. (G) When displaying an effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the production of the big hit gaming state. (H) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during a customer waiting demo display which is executed when a game is not performed. It should be noted that at least two of the effect image displays executed in a plurality of types of effect display situations as described above may be different.

[Other production examples using movable members]
Next, another effect example using a movable body such as the movable member 321 will be described. The effects described below are executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing an example of control of effect presentation and movable body combination operation presentation in a specific super reach presentation.

  As a movable body such as the movable member 321 described above, a movable movable member that includes a plurality of movable members, is in a separated state in a normal state, and can be controlled to operate in a combined state in a specific state is used. It is also good. The unitable movable member may be one in which a plurality of movable members are interlocked by drive means (a motor, a solenoid, etc.) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of movable members, and the plurality of movable members is one It may be interlocked by driving means (motor, solenoid, etc.).

  The description of the control example in FIG. 54 is omitted from the description of the control example in FIG. 53, and the differences from the control example in FIG. 53 are mainly described. FIG. 54 (A) shows a control example of the effect presentation and the movable body combination presentation in the battle reach presentation as shown in FIG. FIG. 53 (B) shows a control example of the effect presentation and the movable body combination presentation in the story reach presentation as shown in FIG.

  The control example in FIG. 54 is different from the control example in FIG. 53 in that a movable body combined motion effect is executed instead of the movable body motion effect in FIG.

  In the battle reach effect shown in FIG. 54 (A), instead of the movable body operation effect by the movable member 321 shown in FIG. 51 (E) in the battle effect as shown in FIG. The movable body uniting effect that operates in the same manner is executed.

  In the story reach effect shown in FIG. 54 (B), instead of the movable body operation effect by the movable member 321 shown in FIG. 52 (E) in the story reach effect as shown in FIG. A movable body combination effect operating in a state is performed.

  Also, in the story reach effect shown in FIG. 54 (B), for example, just before the end of the second half of the story reach effect executed after the message image 54B of “second half of story” in FIG. 52 (C) is displayed, In a specific display area of the display device 9, an operation promotion effect for performing an operation promotion display that promotes the operation of the push button 31 </ b> B such as “press the button” is executed. When the push button 31B is operated by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, or when the predetermined period elapses without the operation being performed within the predetermined period, the above-described movable body coalescence is performed. The presentation is performed.

  It should be noted that the control for executing the movable united effect according to such an operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the end of the battle reach image display in the battle reach effect of FIG. 54 (A). As described above, the control of executing the movable body combination effect in accordance with the operation promotion effect may be performed at the first image change node in the specific super reach effect. Further, the control for executing the movable united effect according to the operation promotion effect may be executed at other video change nodes such as the second video change node in the specific super reach effect. In addition to the push button 31B, for example, other operation means such as a stick controller 31A may be used as the operation means for executing the movable body uniting effect according to the operation of the operation means. Further, the movable body combination effect may be performed in response to detection of a specific action of the player by the detection means for detecting the action of the player such as a motion sensor, not limited to the operation means. In other words, any production control may be executed as long as the production control performs the movable united production according to the player's action.

  Moreover, the control which performs a movable body unification effect according to such an operation promotion effect does not need to be performed. It is selected to select whether or not to execute the control for executing the movable body united effect according to such an operation promotion effect by a predetermined lottery process executed by the effect control CPU 120 and to execute at a predetermined ratio Sometimes it may be executed.

  In the case of executing the movable body coalescing effect using the unitable movable member as described above, the same effect as in the case of executing the movable body coalescing effect using the movable member 321 described above can be obtained. Furthermore, the uniting operation can improve the enjoyment of the effect.

[Movement of moving body during round]
As mentioned above, when a definite variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in a special figure game, a fixed effect symbol which is usually a big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is stopped and displayed as a variation display result of a production symbol You may make it happen. Specifically, when a normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in a special game, the finalized winning symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed at a rate of 100% as a variation display result of the effect symbol. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination at the first ratio (for example, 60%) is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol. Then, it is configured such that a definite effect symbol that is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed at a second ratio (for example, 40%).

  In such a configuration, the CPU for effect control 120 performs probability change control after the end of the big hit gaming state when the fixed effect symbol which is usually a big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the production symbols. An effect suggesting whether or not to be performed is executed in the jackpot display process (S77), the big hit game process (S78), the jackpot end effect process (S79), or the like. In the present embodiment, when the predetermined round (for example, the fifth round) is being executed in the big hit game processing (S78), the round that indicates whether or not the probability change control is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state. It is assumed that the medium suggestion effect is executed. The predetermined round is a normal opening round having a relatively long upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the first state (opening state) advantageous to the player among the rounds in the big hit gaming state .

  In the suggested effect during this round, as shown in FIGS. 56B and 56D, the effect effect of superimposing and displaying the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 on the black image 1001, and the movable member 321 are operated. It is performed in a mode in which the movable body motion effect is linked, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 56 (f) to (h), the character 1060 performs an action of breaking the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061. Depending on whether or not, it is an effect configuration that a challenge effect is performed to notify whether or not the probability change control is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the suggestion effect during the round, as shown in FIG. 55, the effect effect and the movable body operation effect are executed in cooperation with one of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2. As shown in FIG. 56 (b), an effect that superimposes the flame effect image 1010 on the black image 1001 is referred to as a flame effect effect, and as shown in FIG. 56 (d), on the black image 1001. What superimposes and displays the lightning effect image 1020 is referred to as a lightning effect effect.

  If the jackpot type is a definite variation big hit, that is, if the definite variation big hit symbol is displayed as a stop as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it becomes a success mode in which the definite variation control is notified in the challenge effect (FIG. 56 (g)) Then, it is notified that the probability variation control is performed after the big hit gaming state is finished. In the case where the big hit type is non-probable variation big hit, that is, when the big hit symbol is normally displayed as a stop special symbol in the special figure game, there is a failure mode not to notify the positive variation control in the challenge effect (FIG. 56 (h) ), It is notified that the probability variation control is not performed (becomes a low probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished.

  The effect pattern A1 executes the first movable body operation effect and performs the flame effect effect as the first effect effect, and does not execute the second movable object operation effect and the second effect effect, but performs the challenge effect It is an effect pattern to shift to The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern A1 at a rate of 2% when the big hit type is a probability change big hit, and selects the effect pattern A1 at a rate of 50% when the big hit type is a non-probability change big hit. .

  The effect pattern A2 executes the first movable object operation effect and the flame effect effect as the first effect effect, and executes the second movable object operation effect and the flame effect effect as the second effect effect. It is an effect pattern which shifts to challenge effect after execution. The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern A2 at a rate of 8% if the jackpot type is a probability variation big hit, and selects the effect pattern A2 at a percentage of 25% if the jackpot type is a non-probability change jackpot .

  The effect pattern A3 executes the first movable body operation effect and the flame effect effect as the first effect effect, and executes the second movable object operation effect and the lightning effect effect as the second effect effect. It is an effect pattern which shifts to challenge effect after execution. The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern A3 at a ratio of 25% when the big hit type is a probability variation big hit, and selects the effect pattern A3 at a percentage of 1% when the big hit type is a non-probability variation big hit .

  The effect pattern B1 executes the first movable body operation effect and executes the lightning effect effect as the first effect effect, and does not execute the second movable object operation effect and the second effect effect, but performs the challenge effect It is an effect pattern to shift to The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern B1 at a ratio of 25% when the big hit type is a probability variation big hit, and selects the effect pattern B1 at a percentage of 16% when the big hit type is a non-probability variation big hit .

  The effect pattern B2 executes the first movable body operation effect and executes the lightning effect effect as the first effect effect, and executes the second movable object operation effect and the lightning effect effect as the second effect effect. It is an effect pattern which shifts to challenge effect after execution. The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern B2 at a rate of 40% if the big hit type is a probability change big hit, and selects the effect pattern B2 at an 8% rate if the big hit type is a non-probability change big hit .

  When the movable body operation presentation and the effect presentation are executed in each of the presentation patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, the big hit type is a probability variation big hit, in the order of high expectation A3, B2, B1, It becomes A2, A1. The degree of expectation referred to here is calculated by, for example, “probability-performing jackpot ratio ÷ (probability-performing jackpot ratio + non-probability-performing jackpot ratio)” when the rendering is performed in the rendering pattern. Expected effect patterns (A2, A3, B2) in which movable object motion effects and effect effects are executed twice are expected rather than effect patterns (A1, B1) in which movable object motion effects and effect effects are executed only once The degree is high.

  And, when the effect is executed by the effect pattern (A3, B1 or B2) including the lightning effect effect, it is expected more than when the effect is executed by the effect pattern (A1 or A2) not including the lightning effect effect The degree is high. In addition, when the first effect effect is a lightning effect effect (B1 or B2), the expectation is higher than in the case where the first effect effect is a flame effect effect (A1, A2, or A3). However, if the first effect effect is a flame effect effect and the second effect effect is a lightning effect effect, that is, if it is a rising effect, the first and second effect effects are both lightning effects. Expectation is higher than in the case of production.

  Note that there is no so-called down effect pattern in which the first effect effect is a lightning effect effect and the second effect effect is a flame effect effect. By limiting the effects of such decline (prohibiting such effects or making the execution ratio lower than A3), the effect of the effect effects is not reduced.

  Next, an example in which a movable body operation effect and an effect effect are executed with an effect pattern of A1 or A3 will be described using FIG. When the above-described reach result effect is finished, the stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 56 (a) is executed in the effect display device 5, whereby a display is performed in which the stop symbol of the effect symbol is fixed, and the fluctuation display is performed. finish. In this example, when the big hit symbol is usually stopped as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, whether or not the fixed effect symbol which is usually the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the produced symbol, or in the special drawing game It is assumed that when the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol.

  In the example of FIG. 56 (a), the rendering symbols whose symbol numbers are not “4” are not predetermined symbols in the “left”, “middle” and “right” rendering symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C. The stop line is displayed on the effective line of. In addition, a stop symbol effect is performed in which a message image 74 showing the characters “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol. The production control CPU 120 executes the production according to the execution of each round in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state. For example, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed, and an image 1000 is displayed in which the character "Round XX" (XX indicates the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state) is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen. To do. Then, a suggestion effect during the round is executed as an effect corresponding to the execution of the fifth round.

  In the first movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 56B, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 from the tilted position to the standing position (first standing). The background image of the image 1000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 1001 at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the movable member 321 is in the standing state), and at the same time, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 1001. Execute a flame effect effect that displays 1010 superimposed.

  When the flame effect effect is continued for a predetermined period in the upright state where the movable member 321 is at the standing position, the effect control CPU 120 causes the background image of the image 1000 to be a normal background image from the black image 1001 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the flame effect effect is terminated by deleting the flame effect image 1010. Then, the movable member 321 is moved from the standing position to the tilted position at the timing when the flame effect presentation ends (first tilting).

  When A1 is selected as the effect pattern, after the movable member 321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the challenge effect. On the other hand, when A3 is selected as the effect pattern, after the movable member 321 has moved to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 56 (d) is produced. The control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 again from the tilted position to the standing position (second standing). The background image of the image 1000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 1001 at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the movable member 321 is in the standing state), and at the same time, the lightning effect image is displayed on the black image 1001. Execute a lightning effect effect that displays 1020 in a superimposed manner.

  When the lightning effect effect is continued for a predetermined period in a standing state where the movable member 321 is at the standing position, the effect control CPU 120 causes the background image of the image 1000 to be a normal background image from the black image 1001 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the lightning effect effect is terminated by deleting the lightning effect image 1020. Then, the movable member 321 is moved again from the standing position to the tilting position at the timing when the lightning effect effect is finished (the second tilting). Then, after the movable member 321 moves to the tilt position, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the challenge effect.

  If A2 is selected as the effect pattern, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays the flame effect image 1010 on the black image 1001 in the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 56 (d). The flame effect effect is executed again, the second flame effect effect is terminated in FIG. 56 (e), and the process shifts to the challenge effect.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (f), in the challenge effect, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a common effect image regardless of whether the big hit type is a probability variation big hit or a non probability variation big hit.

  This effect image includes an image 1050 in which the word "challenge time" is displayed, and a message image 1051 in which the character "progressive change if rock breaks" displayed in the lower part, and the character 1060 , A hammer 1061 and a rock 1062. This reminds the player that "the character 1060 is an effect that tries to break the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061", and "when the rock is further broken, the big hit type is a definite change big hit regardless of the stop symbol effect. Make the player aware of

  When the jackpot type is a definite variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image of a success mode in which the character 1060 succeeded in breaking the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061 as shown in FIG. 56 (g). , A message image 1070 on which the characters “probability promotion !!” are displayed. Thereby, the player is aware that although the fixed effect symbol which is usually the big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the stopped symbol effect, the definite variation big hit symbol is displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game. .

  When the jackpot type is non-probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 fails to break the hammer 1061 because the character 1060 fails to break the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061 as shown in FIG. 56 (h). While displaying the image of a mode, the message image 1080 on which the character "failure!" Was shown is displayed. Thereby, the player grasps that the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game as the fixed effect symbol which is usually the big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the stopped symbol effect.

  57 (A) to 57 (C) are timing charts showing execution timings and execution periods of the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 is selected.

  In any case of the effect patterns A1 to A3, when the stop symbol effect is executed in which the effect symbols of the symbol numbers that are not the probability variation symbols are aligned and stopped on the predetermined active line at the timing (1), After the big hit display process (S77) is executed at timing (2), the process moves to a big hit game in progress process (S78). In addition, in the big hit game processing (S78), the effect according to each round is executed, and the above-mentioned suggestion effect during the round is executed as the effect according to the fifth round. When the fifth round is started, a flame effect effect is executed when the first standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (3), and the first tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (4). The flame effect production ends when is performed.

  Thus, in the execution period of the first movable body operation effect, the effect effect of the common mode is executed in any of the effect patterns A1 to A3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which effect pattern in the first execution period of the movable body operation effect.

  In the case of the effect pattern A1, the process moves to the challenge effect at timing (7) without the second movable body operation effect being performed thereafter. In the case of the effect pattern A2, when the second raising operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (5), the second flame effect effect is performed, and the second tilting of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (6) When the operation is performed, the second flame effect production ends. And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7). In the case of the effect pattern A3, when the second raising operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (5), the lightning effect effect is performed, and the second tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (6) The lightning effect presentation ends when it is turned off. And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7).

  In any of the effect patterns A1 to A3, in the challenge effect, the result notification is performed at the timing of (8), and it is notified that the success mode becomes the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends, Alternatively, a failure state is entered, and a notification is made that a low probability state is reached after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  Thus, when the production pattern A3 is selected, different types of effect production are produced when the first movable body operation effect is executed and when the second movable body operation effect is executed. As it is designed to be executed, it is possible to diversify the aspect of the effect in which the movable body operation effect and the effect effect cooperate and to improve the interest.

  Further, when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the degree of expectation, ie, later, as compared with the case where the effect pattern A1 or A2 for which the flame effect effect is executed in the first movable body operation effect is selected as in A3. There is a high percentage of success in the staged challenge presentation. Therefore, the player can determine whether the second movable body operation effect is performed or not, and if the second movable body operation effect is performed, the flame effect effect and the lightning effect effect are performed accordingly. It is possible to pay attention to which one is executed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the effect in which the movable body operation effect and the effect effect cooperate.

  In addition, the effect pattern for which the lightning effect effect is executed has a high degree of expectation compared to the effect pattern for which only the flame effect effect is executed, but like the effect pattern A3, the flame effect is generated by the first movable body operation effect effect Even when the effect is executed, by providing a effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed by the second movable body operation effect, the flame effect effect is executed by the first movable body operation effect Even so, it can be expected that the lightning effect production will be executed in the second movable body operation production without discouraging the player. Furthermore, even when compared with the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed in the first movable body operation effect, the effect pattern A3 has a higher expectation, so that the flame effect effect in the first movable object operation effect is When executed, the player's interest can be sustained.

(Modification 1)
During execution of the effect effect, an operation promotion effect for performing an operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the push button 31B may be executed in a specific display area of the effect display device 9. Then, when the player operates the push button 31B within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 may change the mode of the effect effect.

  A specific example is shown in FIG. 58 (a) to 58 (c) are the same as FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), and a description thereof is omitted. After the movable member 321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 from the tilt position to the upright position in the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 56 (i). Move again (2nd standing up). Then, at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (timing when the standing state), the background image of the image 1000 is changed to the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1020 is superimposed on the black image 1001 and displayed. Execute the flame effect production again.

  When the flame effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 321 is at the upright position, the effect control CPU 120 causes the push button 31B to be displayed on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010 as shown in FIG. An operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image made up of an image 1090 that imitates the message 1091 and a message image 1091 showing the characters “Press!” Is superimposed and displayed.

  This operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends) when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses without the push button 31B being operated from the start of display. When the bush button 31B is operated within a period in which the operation promotion image is displayed, the operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect is ended). Then, when the bush button 31B is operated, the CPU for effect control 120 selects one of the effect patterns which can change the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player as the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. , The effect image displayed superimposed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. On the other hand, when the effect pattern which does not change the mode of the effect effect according to the player's operation is selected as the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 56 (l), the effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 is displayed. The flame effect image 1010 remains unchanged.

  FIG. 59 (A) shows the execution timing and execution period of the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when the effect pattern capable of changing the mode of the effect effect is selected according to the player's operation. It is a timing chart.

  The description regarding the timings (1) to (4) is the same as that in FIG. When the second raising operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (5), the second flame effect effect is executed. Then, the operation promotion image is displayed at the timing (X) within the second flame effect production period. When the operation promotion image is displayed, the effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020 in response to the push button 32B being operated at the timing (Y). Let The lightning effect effect ends when the second tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (6). And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7).

  Thus, by making it possible to change the aspect of the effect effect according to the player's operation, the interest of the effect effect can be further improved. Further, by changing from a flame effect image 1010 having a low expectation level to a lightning effect image 1020 having a high expectation level in accordance with the player's operation, it is possible to make the effect surprising.

  For example, in the above-described effect pattern A2, the operation promotion image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010 within the period in which the second flame effect effect is executed. Then, when the push button 31B is operated, the operation promotion image is deleted (the operation promotion effect is ended), but the effect image superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 is not changed as it is the flame effect image 1010. Production control shall be performed. Thereby, you may comprise "the production pattern which does not change the aspect of an effect production according to a player's operation."

  In addition, in the effect pattern A3 described above, when the second movable body operation effect is executed, the flame effect image 1010 instead of the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed on the black image 1001 as an effect effect. Every time, the operation promotion image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010 within the period in which the flame effect image 1010 is displayed. When the push button 31B is operated, the operation promotion image is deleted (the operation promotion effect ends), and the effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 changes from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. The presentation control shall be performed as follows. Thereby, you may comprise "the effect pattern which changes the aspect of an effect effect according to a player's operation".

  In the example shown in FIG. 59 (A), when the flame effect effect is changed to the lightning effect effect according to the operation of the push button 31B, the display of the black image 1001 already started is continued without ending. Thus, only the effect image to be superimposed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. That is, assuming that the effect effect is constituted by the black image 1001 which is the first effect and the effect image which is the second effect, only the aspect of the second effect is changed without changing the aspect of the first effect. This makes it possible to give an impression as if the aspect has changed in accordance with the player's operation during the execution of a series of effects.

(Modification 2)
In the above-mentioned example, the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect are effects to be executed during the execution of the round, and indicate whether or not the probability change control is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state Not only in such a form, but also corresponding to each of the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B in the special symbol game. As a reach effect to be executed when the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner, movable body operation effects, effect effects, and challenge effects are executed, and it is controlled to the big hit gaming state by these effect patterns and effect modes You may make it suggest.

  The above-described effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 are applied as effect patterns of the movable body operation effect and effect effect executed in the reach state. That is, when the movable body operation effects and the effect effects are executed as reach effects in the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, respectively, in the order in which the proportion controlled to the big hit gaming state is high, A3, B2, B1, A2, and A1.

  FIG. 59 (B) shows a control example of effect presentation and movable object presentation, and challenge presentation as reach presentation. Between the start (11) of the variable display of the production symbol (special symbol) and the generation (12) of the reach state, the variable display of the production symbol in the production mode of the normal variable display as shown in FIG. 51 (A) Is executed in the effect display device 5.

  When the reach state occurs at the timing (12) in the effect display device 5, the process shifts to reach effect. In the reach effect, the flame effect effect is executed when the first standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (13), and the flame is performed when the first tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (14). The effect effect ends (example of effect patterns A1 to A3).

  In the case of the effect pattern A1, the process moves to the challenge effect at timing (17) without the second movable body operation effect being performed thereafter. In the case of the production pattern A2, the second flame effect production is executed when the second standing motion of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (15), and the second tilt of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (16). When the action is performed, the second flame effect presentation ends. Then, it shifts to the challenge effect at timing (17). In the case of the effect pattern A3 illustrated in FIG. 59B, the lightning effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (15), and the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (16). When the second tilting operation is performed, the lightning effect effect ends. Then, it shifts to the challenge effect at timing (17).

  And, when it is decided that the fixed effect design which is the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the fluctuation display result of the production design, it becomes the success aspect at the timing (18) in the challenge production, as a result of the fluctuation display It is informed that it is controlled by the big hit game state. If it is determined that the fixed effect symbol that is a reach-losing combination is to be stopped and displayed as a result of variation display of the effect symbol, the challenge effect may be a failure mode at timing (18) and may not be controlled to the big hit gaming state. Informed. Thus, the reach result is displayed on the effect display device 5 at the timing (18), thereby informing the reach result. After that, when the reach result effect is finished, the stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 51 (G) is executed in the effect display device 5 at timing (19), and the display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol is performed. At the same time, the variable display ends.

(Other variations)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the movable body operation effect related to the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 is an effect of moving the movable member 321 from the tilt position (first position) to the standing position (second position). Although described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and each movable member can be obtained by moving each movable member from the first position to the second position corresponding to each of the plurality of movable members. In the state of being present at each second position, the movable body combining operation presentation effect may be performed in which the specific form (the united form) is configured by the collection of the movable members. The specific form (the united form) is canceled by moving each movable member from the second position to the first position corresponding to each of the movable body operation effects. Note that the movable body combining operation effect will be described in detail also in FIG. 54 described later.

  Further, the movable body operation effect may be an effect in which the form of the movable member changes, or may be an effect in which a predetermined operation, for example, an operation in a rotating manner, is performed without changing the position of the movable member. For example, a movable body operation effect is an effect that the movable member changes to an expansion / contraction mode, an effect that changes to an open / close mode, an effect that changes to an expansion / contraction mode, or the movable member has another role (for example, It may be an effect that combines with an accessory that is fixed to the game board surface and does not operate.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the effect linked to the movable body operation effect is the effect effect in which the effect image is superimposed on the black image 1001 in the effect display device 5 is described. The effect linked to the movable body operation effect may be an effect of causing the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, or the light emitting part 321A of the movable member 321 to emit light in a specific manner. For example, in the production patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, in place of the “flame effect production”, the “top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, or the light emitting unit 321A are changed to the first emission color (for example, The effect of “light emission in blue)” is executed, and “the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, or the light emitting unit 321A are replaced with the second light emission color (for example, red) instead of the“ lightning effect effect ”. It is better to execute the “effect to emit light with”.

  In addition, the effect linked with the movable body operation effect may be an effect that causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a specific sound (specific sound effect or specific music). For example, in the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, "effect to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output the first specific sound (for example, sound effect with low sound volume in low range)" is executed instead of "flame effect effect", Instead of the “lightning effect effect”, “the effect of outputting the second specific sound (for example, a high-frequency sound effect)” from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the movable body operation effect and the effect effect to be executed in cooperation with this, by performing the challenge effect on the effect display device 5, a predetermined state (probability state or big hit gaming state) However, the notification effect is not limited to such a form, and the notification effect for notifying whether or not the predetermined state is reached is operated in the previously performed movable body motion effect. Depending on whether or not the movable member 321 or a movable member different from this is operated, it may be an effect of informing whether or not to be in a predetermined state.

  For example, when notifying that a predetermined state (a positive change state or a big hit gaming state) is to be made after the effects of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 are ended, the movable member 321 is moved from the tilting position to the standing position At the same time, a special image different from the flame effect image 1010 and the lightning effect image 1020 may be superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of movable body operation effects are executed as in the production patterns A2, A3, and B2, the first production is performed with the end of the first movable body operation effect. Although an example has been described in which both the black image 1001 and the effect image that is the second effect are erased and return to the normal background image, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the first movable body motion effect is finished, the first effect image is deleted, while the black image 1001 does not continue to return to the normal background image, but the second movable body motion effect. When is executed, the second effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the continuing black image 1001. With this type of configuration, the player expects the second movable body operation effect to be executed because the black image 1001 continues even after the first movable body operation effect is finished. can do.

  Furthermore, in the case of such a form, in the effect pattern (A1 and B1) in which the movable body motion effect is executed only once, the first movable body motion effect is finished and superimposed on the black image 1001. Even after the effect image has been deleted, the black image 1001 may be continued for a predetermined period (for example, until transition to a challenge effect). By doing this, it is possible to maintain the player's interest for a predetermined period of time even after the end of the first movable body operation presentation.

  Further, before the first movable body operation effect is executed, when the black image 1001 as the first effect is displayed in advance and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the movable member 321 is in an upright state). In addition, the first effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001. Thus, the effect image may be displayed as long as it is displayed within the display period of the black image 1001 (the second effect is performed within the execution period of the first effect).

  In addition, when the first movable body operation effect is completed, the second movable body operation effect is executed without continuously returning both the black image 1001 and the first effect image to the normal background image. In this case, the effect image superimposed on the continuous black image 1001 may be changed from the first effect image to the second effect image.

  Although the above embodiment has described an example in which the period in which the movable member 321 is in the upright state matches the period in which the effect image is displayed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the movable member 321 is inclined. The display of the effect image may be started during or before the movement period of moving from the position to the rising position, or during the movement period of moving of the movable member 321 from the rising position to the tilting position You may make it the display of an effect image end after the period. “Effect production is executed in accordance with the movement of the movable member 321” means “after the movable member 321 starts moving from the tilted position to the standing position, the standing state is reached, and further the movement from the standing position to the tilted position is performed. It is sufficient that at least a part of the period until the end of is overlapped with at least a part of [the period during which the effect image is displayed].

  In the above embodiment, it is suggested that the probability change control is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state by the effect of the mode in which the movable body operation effect and the effect effect cooperate, or the fluctuation display of the effect pattern ends To indicate whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the display result is derived and displayed, but is not limited to such a form, and suggests whether a special reach effect is performed or not It may be a thing that indicates whether or not it is controlled to a big hit gaming state for a variable display (a special figure game that is put on hold) in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied ( It may be a so-called pre-reading notice effect).

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As in the battle reach effect shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 53 (A) and the story reach effect shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 (B), movable object effects can be executed in a plurality of types of effect display Depending on which type of effect display is performed, an effect effect display in which an effect image is superimposed on a black image and an effect effect display in which an effect image is superimposed on the effect image are displayed. Since it is possible to display such a different kind of effect effect display, it is possible to enhance the effect by combining the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 51 (E) and FIG. 53 (A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect is performed in which a movable object effect that operates a movable object such as the movable member 321 is executed. When the game is performed, the effect of superposing the effect effect display of the specific aspect such as the particle effect image 71 of FIGS. 51D and 51E on the specific type of effect display such as the display of the victory effect image is executed. Since it is possible, it becomes possible to link the effect display of the specific type in which the movable object effect is executed and the effect effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5, and the movable object of the effect display of the specific type It is possible to further enhance the production effect in which the operation and the production effect display of the display means are linked.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 52 (E) and FIG. 53 (B), a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect is performed in which a movable object effect that operates a movable object such as the movable member 321 is executed. 52D and 52E, a predetermined image is displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5 such as the black image 72. Since effects to be displayed superimposed on each other are executable, it becomes possible to cooperate between predetermined types of predetermined effects for which movable object effects are to be executed and effect effects displayed by display means such as the effect display device 5 In addition, it is possible to emphasize the movable body effect and improve the interest of the game.

  (4) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body as in the initial operation in the movable member initialization process of step S51B of FIG. 39, and the step S51A of FIG. As in the operation in the movable member break-in process of FIG. 41, the break-in operation of moving the movable body is performed. For this reason, since the movement of the movable body is not accustomed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable body from operating favorably.

The gaming machine described above also has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
A movable object (for example, a movable member 321) movable to a standby position (for example, the first position shown in FIGS. 31 and 32) and an advance position (for example, the second position shown in FIGS. 31 and 32);
A confirmation operation (for example, also referred to as an initial operation in the movable member initialization process in step S51B of FIG. 39, an initial operation) for confirming an operation of the movable object when the game machine is activated, and the movable object Control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing a break-in operation (for example, step S51A of FIG. 39, an operation in movable member break-in processing of FIG. 41, and a short initial operation).

  According to such a configuration, the confirmation operation for confirming the movement of the movable object and the break-in operation for moving the movable object are performed. For this reason, since the movement of the movable object is not used, it is possible to suppress the influence on the movement of the movable object. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable object from operating well.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
When an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object in the break-in operation, error processing means (for example, step S513 and step S517 in FIG. 41) that performs error processing (for example, notification of abnormality) is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable object in the break-in operation, error processing is performed. As a result, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to a state in which the movable object does not operate normally.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
The control means executes the break-in operation prior to the confirmation operation (see, for example, FIG. 39).

  According to such a configuration, the break-in operation is executed before the confirmation operation. As a result, it can suppress that a movable object does not operate | move favorably in confirmation operation | movement.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3),
When an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable object in the break-in operation, the control means prohibits the execution of the confirmation operation (eg, until the notification stop operation is performed in steps S514 and S518 in FIG. 41). The movable member initialization process of step S51B of FIG. 39 is not performed).

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object in the break-in operation, the execution of the confirmation operation is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being performed while the movable object does not operate normally.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The movable object is moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation.

  According to such a configuration, the movable object is moved to the advanced position by the different power source during the game and during the execution of the break-in operation. As a result, the break-in operation can be performed with a suitable power source.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5),
The movable object is an elastic body (for example, a tension spring 323, which may be another elastic body such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or rubber) during the game, and the elastic body during the running-in operation. A strong motor (for example, the second effect motor 330) is moved to the advanced position as a power source.

  According to such a configuration, in the break-in operation, the motor having a stronger force than the elastic body is used as the power source of the movable object. As a result, the movable object can be more reliably moved to the advanced position in the break-in operation.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The movable object includes an electrical cable (for example, cable 361) that bends and expands with the movement of the movable object.
The break-in operation is an operation of bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object.

  According to such a configuration, the confirmation operation for confirming the movement of the movable object and the break-in operation for bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object are performed. For this reason, since the movement of the electric cable is not accustomed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the movement of the movable object. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the movable object does not operate well.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7),
The electric cable is provided in the vicinity of an object that emits heat (for example, the LCD of the effect display device 5, the first effect motor 303, and the second effect motor 330).

  According to such a configuration, the electrical cable becomes flexible due to heat. As a result, the movable object can be moved more reliably.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, the break-in operation is an operation of bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the movable object is configured to move along the rail, the movable object is configured to move with a ball screw or a linear guide, and the movable object is a plain bearing. Or a bearing such as a metal bearing or a resin bearing, the operation may be such that the lubricant such as oil or grease moves and becomes accustomed so as to become familiar. In addition, in the case where the movable object has a sliding portion such as rotation or linear motion, it may be possible to move the fixing of the sliding portion so as to smooth and aggravate it.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, the break-in operation is performed at startup. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation may be performed regularly during a demonstration after a game is not performed after activation. Even if it does in this way, it can control that a movable object does not operate | move favorably during a game.

  (11) The cable 361 according to the above-described embodiment supplies power to the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power or control signals are supplied to other electrical components (for example, actuators such as motors and solenoids that move movable objects and display devices such as LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) that displays images). It may be

  (12) The cable 361 may be a flexible flat cable, a flat cable in which a plurality of coated wires are arranged and fused, a single wire or a stranded wire, or a twisted wire. It may be a paired line.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation and the confirmation operation are performed separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation and the confirmation operation may be executed as a series of operations.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the initial position of the movable object is detected in the confirmation operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the break-in operation, the initial position of the movable object may be detected. In addition to the break-in operation and the confirmation operation, the initial position of the movable object may be detected.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a gaming ball with a predetermined number of balls is a gaming machine. The number of loaned balls encapsulated inside and lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted The present invention is also applicable to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the gaming values. It can also be applied to slot machines.

  In the embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol that is the variation display result, and then display the final stop symbol. Although the stop display is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final stop design is stopped after variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols without including the final stop design that is a variable display result. It may be displayed. That is, the final stop symbol that is the variation display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for variation display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the variation is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence, one is used. Although the example of transmitting the variation pattern command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above embodiment, as a substrate on which a circuit for controlling the rendering device is mounted, a rendering control substrate 12, an audio control substrate 13, a drive control substrate 16B, light emitter control substrates 16C to 16F, etc. are provided. However, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) having a circuit for controlling the effect display device 5 etc. and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (a movable body, a light emitter, a speaker, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with a 2nd production control board.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer, but the game control microcomputer 100 transmits an effect control command to another board. Alternatively, it may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer in the effect control substrate 12 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply be passed through another substrate, or control related to the movable body, the light emitter, the speaker, etc. is executed, and the received command is used as it is or, for example, as a simplified command. You may make it change and you may make it transmit to the microcomputer for effect control which controls the effect display apparatus 5. FIG. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer performs display control according to the received command in the same manner as performing display control according to the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 100 in the above embodiment. It can be performed.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game is shown based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 performs a display result (whether it is a big hit) or a winning determination (pre-reading determination) of the variation pattern type, and a command (design) indicating the winning determination result. (Designation command, variable category command) is transmitted, and on the production control microcomputer side, the case where the pre-reading notice production is executed based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning is shown. For example, the winning control determination (prefetch determination) may be performed on the production control microcomputer side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a command that specifies only the value of the random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and the effect control microcomputer side specifies the random number specified by those commands. The determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) may be performed based on the value of.

  It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

[2. Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described.
The second embodiment is a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a light emission effect to make the LED 9 emit light. Of course, embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the embodiments described below.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c via the serial-parallel conversion circuit described in the first embodiment, and these LEDs 9 The light emission effect is executed by turning on / off the.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for describing output timings of signals from drive output terminals in the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the present embodiment.
In this embodiment, 12-channel drive output terminals are applied to the light emitter drivers 413a, 413a, and 413c corresponding to the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c, respectively. These serial-parallel conversion circuits are configured such that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. .

  In the present embodiment, in the internal oscillation clock circuit incorporated in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, a clock signal of 6 MHz is output as in the above-described embodiment. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is separated into three 1 MHz clock signals, and drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are divided into three groups of four channels per group, Distribute signal output timing.

  Specifically, group 1 is configured by four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is configured by four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and group 3 is configured by four channels of drive output terminals Q8 to Q11. Composed. The drive output terminals in the same group (for example, drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in group 1) have the same signal output timing, but drive output terminals in different groups (for example, the drive output of group 1). The output timing is distributed between the terminal Q0 and the drive output terminal Q4 of the group 2.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration shown in FIG. 17 is applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to each of the light emitter drivers 413a, 413a and 413c.

  In this embodiment, a 12-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is applied, and drive output terminals are divided into 3 groups of 4 channels per group. However, a 24-channel serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is described. And the drive output terminals may be grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group.

  In addition, it is possible to similarly configure a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit having more than 24 channels, and to group drive output terminals into a plurality of groups per prescribed number of channels per group. is there.

  Hereinafter, in the case of “time”, a time width (length of time) is indicated. In addition, “period” indicates a continuous time range from one timing to another timing. In addition, “period” indicates the predetermined time when the same phenomenon is repeated every predetermined time.

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the principle of the light-emitting effect in the present embodiment.
The CPU 120 for effect control performs a light emission effect by performing an effect lottery using a light emission effect distribution table 1212 described later.

  In the present embodiment, at the timing when the reach state occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “reach state generation timing”), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control boards 16D and 16E. , 16F, the left frame LED 9b, the sky frame LED 9a and the right frame LED 9c are caused to emit light, respectively, to execute the light emission effect.

  In the present embodiment, the light emission effect is generated by the light emission pattern (first pattern) for causing the LED 9 to emit light in a single color (specific color) and the light emission pattern (second pattern) for causing the LED 9 to emit light in a plurality of colors. The present invention is characterized in that the big hit reliability differs between the first pattern and the second pattern, and the presentation period differs. Here, for simplicity of explanation, the big hit reliability is "low" indicating that the reliability is low, "medium" indicating that the reliability is medium, and "high" indicating that the reliability is high. The principle will be explained by dividing it into four types, “highest” indicating that the reliability is the highest.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the light-emitting effect in the present embodiment.
In this figure, a timing chart showing a control example of light emission effect in a specific super reach effect is shown, and a control example of light emission effect in battle reach effect is shown.

  In the following description, the timing at which the light emission effect starts is referred to as “light emission effect start timing”, and the timing at which the light emission effect ends is referred to as “light emission effect end timing”. Further, in the present embodiment, the light emission colors of “blue” and “red” which are single color light emission colors and the “rainbow color” light emission color which is light emission color represented by a plurality of colors are exemplified.

  When a battle reach effect is executed, the effect pattern is displayed in the normal change display mode as shown in FIG. 51 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect pattern (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

  In the effect display device 5, when a reach state occurs at time “tm1”, a message image 53 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C, and a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect, etc. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, in response to the occurrence of the reach state, the effect control CPU 120 starts the execution of the light emission effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission effect start timing is set as the timing at which the reach state occurs (time “tm1”).

  As described above, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect symbol variation display is simultaneously started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In accordance with a predetermined stop order such as “,” “right” and “middle”, the variation display of the effect symbols is sequentially stopped in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C, and finally the effect is displayed in all the effect symbol display areas. When the symbol stops and the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

  After the variation display of the production design is started at the same time, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), when the same design is stopped at the stage where the production design display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right" stop, reach It becomes a state. The effect control CPU 120 measures the elapsed time from the start of the change by a timer or the like, and when the elapsed time reaches the time from the start of the change predetermined for the change pattern to the reach state occurrence, the light emission effect start It judges as timing and starts execution of the light emission production.

  FIG. 61A shows an example in which the big hit reliability is lower than in the cases of (B) and (C), and the fluctuation display result is “lost”. In this example, there is shown a case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at time "tn1" during the battle reach effect. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn1”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn1”. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light with the emission color A. The luminescent color A in this case may be a luminescent color of a single color, and may be a luminescent color (for example, blue) indicating that the big hit reliability is low.

  Here, the light emission effect period is determined based on the jackpot reliability in the variation. Specifically, the light emission effect period is controlled to be longer as the big hit reliability is higher. The light emission effect period indicates a continuous time range from the light emission effect start timing to the light emission effect end timing.

  FIG. 61B shows an example in which the big hit reliability is higher than that in the case of (A) but lower than that in the case of (C), and the fluctuation display result is “lost”. In this example, there is shown a case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at time "tn2 (> tn1)" during the battle reach effect. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn2”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn2”. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light with the emission color B. The light emission color B in this case may be a light emission color of a single color, and may be a light emission color (for example, green) indicating that the big hit reliability is medium.

  FIG. 61C shows an example in which the big hit reliability is higher than the cases of (A) and (B), but lower than the case of (D), and the variation display result is “lost”. Yes. In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time “tn3 (> tn2)” during the reach result effect executed after the battle reach effect is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn3”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn3”. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light with the emission color C. The luminescent color C in this case may be a luminescent color (for example, red) which indicates that the big hit reliability is high.

  FIG. 61 (D) shows an example in which the big hit reliability is the highest and the variation display result is "big hit". In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time “tn4 (> tn3)” at which the change display of the special symbol ends in the stop symbol effect executed last after the reach result effect after the battle reach effect. Show. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time "tn4", and the light emission effect period is a period from time "tm1" to "tn4". In this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light in the special emission color. The special light emission color in this case may be a special color (for example, iridescent color) indicating that the big hit reliability is "highest".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the light emission effect, the timing to start the light emission of the LED 9 (the light emission effect start timing) is common (for example, at the time of reach condition occurrence), but the timing to end the light emission (light emission effect end timing) By making the difference, the player can have a sense of expectation. In other words, the higher the big hit expectation level, the longer the time for which light emission continues, so that the player can expect a big hit and have a sense of excitement.

  In addition, when the special symbol variation display result is a display result corresponding to the big hit, the player can have a special sense of expectation by performing a light emission effect by a light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light with a special light emission color. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the three frames 9 including the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c are caused to emit light to realize a light emission effect. However, all of the plurality of LEDs 9 emit light with the same emission color. The plurality of LEDs 9 may emit light with different colors. Hereinafter, a case where light emission is performed with different emission colors will be exemplified.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of a light emission pattern table 1211 which is a table in which the light emission pattern of the LED 9 for defining the light emission effect is stored and stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 in the present embodiment. .

  In the light emission pattern table 1211, for example, a category, a light emission pattern, an electric component, a light emission type, a light emission color, and a light emission presentation time (millisecond ms) are defined in association with each other.

In the category, a category in which the light emission pattern is classified is defined. In the present embodiment, the light emission patterns (hereinafter referred to as "sky frame light emission colors") of the sky frame LED 9 have the same color as the same category, and the first numbers of the light emission patterns (LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4, ...) to distinguish.
In the light emission pattern, the number of the light emission pattern of the LED 9 applied in the light emission effect is determined according to the category.
In the electric component, types of LEDs 9 to be lighted (the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c in the present embodiment) are determined in the light emission pattern.

  In the light emission type, in the light emission pattern, the type of light emission of each electric component is determined. In this light emission type, “continuous” indicating that continuous light emission of the same color (hereinafter referred to as “continuous light emission”) is performed, or “switching” indicating that light emission is performed by changing (changing) a plurality of colors. And “flashing” indicating that the lighting is performed by turning on / off one color. Continuous light emission means that lighting is performed continuously and continuously (continuously).

  For the light emission color, a color for causing each of the electric components to emit light is defined in the light emission pattern. The emission colors include colors such as “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”.

  In the light emission effect time, a time width (length of time) for executing the light emission effect by applying the light emission pattern is defined. Specifically, for the light emission pattern belonging to the same category, an appropriate light emission effect time corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation pattern is determined in correspondence to each fluctuation pattern described in FIG. The light emission effect time is a time for causing the LED 9 to emit light starting from the light emission effect start timing described above. Since the light emission effect time differs for each light emission pattern, the light emission effect end timing changes according to the light emission pattern.

  In addition, as can be seen from FIG. 62, in the light emission pattern table 1211, light emission patterns for causing each LED 9 to emit light in the same manner and light emission in different manners to each LED 9 are performed for light emission patterns of the same category. The light emission pattern to be activated is determined. By doing this, it is possible to realize light emission effects of a plurality of variations, and it is possible to enhance the effect of light emission effects and improve the game interest.

  FIG. 63 is a light emission effect distribution table 1212 in which an allocation for selecting a light emission pattern set in the light emission pattern table 1211 is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of this table structure.

  FIG. 63A shows a non-emission light emission effect distribution table 1212A, which is a distribution table at the time of an omission, and FIG. FIG. 63C shows a normal big hit light emission effect distribution table 1212C which is a distribution table at the time of probability variation big hit, and these tables respectively show a fluctuation pattern type, a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern allocation. , And light emission pattern allocation are defined in association with each other.

In the variation pattern type, a variation pattern type designated by a variation pattern type designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is determined.
In the variation pattern, a variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern type and defined by a variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11 is defined. In the figure, the contents of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation display time are shown in parentheses.
The rate at which the variation pattern is selected is defined in the variation pattern distribution.
In the light emission pattern allocation, the ratio of the light emission patterns of the category (LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4,...) Corresponding to the ceiling frame light emission color among the light emission patterns determined in the light emission pattern table 1211 is determined. It has been.

This will be specifically described.
63A is defined as “variation in normal fluctuation”, “out of normal reach”, and “out of super reach” as variation pattern types.
In the fluctuation pattern type “normal fluctuation deviates”, “a deviation in normal fluctuation (7 seconds)” and “a deviation in normal fluctuation (15 seconds)” are defined as fluctuation patterns.
In the variation pattern type “normal reach loss”, “normal reach loss (20 seconds)” and “normal reach (30 seconds)” are defined as variation patterns.
In the variation pattern type “super-reaching”, “first super-reach (battle production) is off (40 seconds)” and “second super-reaching (story production) is off (50 seconds)” are defined as the fluctuation patterns. Yes.

  For the fluctuation pattern allocation, "60%" is for the fluctuation pattern "displacement in normal fluctuation (7 seconds)", and "20%" for the fluctuation pattern "displacement in normal fluctuation (15 seconds)", and the fluctuation pattern "normal reach" “9%” for “out of range (20 seconds)”, “6%” for the fluctuation pattern “out of normal reach (30 seconds)”, and “out of the first super reach (battle production)” (40 seconds). "2%" is defined for the fluctuation pattern "2nd super reach (story effect) deviated (50 seconds)" for "3%", and these ratios become "100%" when added together.

  In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is defined for all of the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern types “displacement in normal fluctuation” and “normal reach loss”. On the other hand, for the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type "Super reach out", blue "70%" is green "20%" in the variation pattern "1st super reach (40 seconds) out of battle effect". However, the red "10%" and the rainbow "0%" are respectively defined, and the blue "65%" is green for the variation pattern "second super reach (story directing) deviated (50 seconds)". "25%", red "10%" and rainbow "0%" are defined respectively.

  In the light emission effect distribution table 1212A at the time of departure, the light emission pattern allocation is all "0%" for the fluctuation pattern types "normal fluctuation out" and "normal reach out". For this reason, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the light-emitting effect in the case of the deviation and the normal reach in the normal fluctuation. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type “super-reaching”, the light emission pattern allocation is set so that the relation of blue> green> red is relatively high, and the ratio of blue accounts for the majority. ing. For this reason, the ratio which performs the light emission effect which makes LED9 light-emit in blue becomes the highest. “Rainbow” is set to “0%”. For this reason, the light emission effect which makes LED9 light-emit in a rainbow color is not performed.

“Normal reach big hit” and “super reach big hit” are defined as the variation pattern types in the normal big hit light emission effect distribution table 1212 B of FIG. 63 (B).
In the fluctuation pattern type “normal reach jackpot”, “normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)” and “normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)” are defined as fluctuation patterns.
The variation pattern types “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” and “second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)” are defined.

  For the fluctuation pattern allocation, the fluctuation pattern “normal reach big hit (20 seconds)” is “5%”, the fluctuation pattern “normal reach big hit (30 seconds)” is “10%”, and the fluctuation pattern “first super reach ( "Battle production) Big hit (40 seconds)" is set to "40%", and the fluctuation pattern "Second super reach (Story production) big hit (50 seconds)" is set to "45%", respectively. The total is “100%”.

  In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is defined for all the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type “normal reach big hit”. On the other hand, the variation pattern “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” included in the fluctuation pattern type “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” is blue “20%” Green “30%”, red “30%” and rainbow “20%” are defined respectively, and the variation pattern “second super reach (story directing) big hit (50 seconds))” is blue “15 "%", Green "35%", red "30%" and rainbow "20%" are respectively defined.

  In the normal big hit light emission effect distribution table 1212B, the light emission pattern allocation is all set to “0%” for the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of the normal reach big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type “super reach big hit”, values are set in the light emission pattern allocation so that the proportions of green and red become relatively high. For this reason, the ratio which performs the light emission effect which makes LED9 light-emit green or red becomes relatively high.

“Normal reach big hit” and “super reach big hit” are defined as the variation pattern types in the probability variation big hit time light emission effect distribution table 1212 C of FIG. 63 (C).
In the fluctuation pattern type “normal reach jackpot”, “normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)” and “normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)” are defined as fluctuation patterns.
The variation pattern types “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” and “second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)” are defined.

  For the fluctuation pattern allocation, the fluctuation pattern “normal reach big hit (20 seconds)” is “1%”, the fluctuation pattern “normal reach big hit (30 seconds)” is “4%”, and the fluctuation pattern “first super reach ( “Battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” is set to “40%”, and the fluctuation pattern “second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)” is set to “55%”. The total is “100%”.

  In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is defined for all the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type “normal reach big hit”. On the other hand, in the variation pattern “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” included in the fluctuation pattern type “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)”, blue “5%” Green “25%”, red “40%” and rainbow “30%” are defined respectively, and the variation pattern “second super reach (story directing) big hit (50 seconds))” is blue “1 "%", "29%" for green, "40%" for red, and "30%" for rainbow.

  In the probability variation big hit light emission effect distribution table 1212C, for the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”, the light emission pattern allocation is all “0%”. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of the normal reach big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type “super reach big hit”, values are determined in light emission pattern allocation so that the proportions of red and rainbow colors become relatively high. For this reason, the ratio which performs light emission production which makes LED9 light-emit in red or rainbow color becomes relatively high.

  The effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern command transmitted from the main board 11, according to the allocation defined in the corresponding change pattern in the light emission effect distribution table 1212, the top frame light emission. Select a color. Then, among the light emission patterns defined in the light emission pattern table 1211 of FIG. 62 and included in the selected skylight frame color category, the light emission pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected, The light emission pattern used for the light emission effect is determined.

  Here, the jackpot reliability is defined as “occupancy fluctuation in the overall appearance rate including both the jackpot fluctuation and the outlier fluctuation” for a plurality of light emission patterns. From the light emission pattern allocation determined in the light emission effect distribution table 1212, the occupancy corresponding to the emission color “blue” is generally a big hit reliability “low”, and the occupancy corresponding to the emission color “green” is a big hit reliability. The occupancy corresponding to “medium” and the luminescent color “red” corresponds to the big hit reliability “high”, and the occupancy corresponding to the luminescent color “rainbow” corresponds to the big hit reliability “highest”.

  Here, the description has been made assuming that the category of the light emission pattern is selected based on the light emission color of the top frame, but this is merely an example, and the light emission color of the left frame LED 9b (the light emission color of the left frame) and the light emission of the right frame LED 9c. The light emission pattern table 1211 and the light emission effect distribution table 1212 may be defined so as to select the category of the light emission pattern based on the color (right frame light emission color).

  Further, in the above-described light emission effect distribution table 1212, the light emission pattern allocation is set to “0%” for the fluctuation pattern types for normal fluctuations, normal reach deviations, and normal reach big hits. An allocation may be determined for each.

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of the light emission control table 1213 that is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 and used for the effect control CPU 120 to perform the light emission control of the LED 9 in the present embodiment.
In the light emission control table 1213, for example, a light emission pattern, a driver ID, an output terminal number, an electrical component, and light emission control generation data are defined in association with each other.

Each light emission pattern defined in the light emission pattern table 1211 is stored in the light emission pattern.
The driver ID stores IDs (“D1”, “D2”, and “D3” in order in this embodiment) as identification information for identifying each of the light emitter drivers 413a, 413b, and 413c.
In the output terminal number, the number (00 to 11 in the present embodiment) of the output terminal of the light emitter driver 413 is stored.
In the electrical component, the light-emitting driver 413 and electrical components corresponding to the output terminal numbers (in the present embodiment, “left frame”, “top frame”, “right frame”) are stored in order.
The light emission control generation data is data for controlling a serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and is used to generate light emission control data based on the control data format described in FIG. Data is stored.

FIGS. 65 and 66 are diagrams showing an example of the data configuration of the light emission control generation data included in the light emission control table 1213 described above.
Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit light emission time, a light emission control cycle, and format data.

The data name stores the data name of format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table 1213.
In the format type, identification information (“basic” or “extended”) to which format of the basic format (EX = 0) and the extended format (EX = 1) shown in FIG. 8 is applied is stored. The

The address stores the address set in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver.
In the data transmission cycle, a cycle in which light emission control data is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter drivers 413 of the respective light emitter control boards via the effect control relay board 16A is stored. In this embodiment, this data transmission cycle is described as 10 ms (milliseconds).
The unit light emission time stores a unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light.

  In the light emission control period, time to be a control unit of light emission for one period (hereinafter, this period is referred to as “light emission control period”) is stored. The light emission control cycle differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, when the light emission type is "continuous" or "flashing", a time such as "100 ms" can be set, and the light emission type is "switched" (special light emission color associated with change of plural colors ( In the case of rainbow-colored light emission or the like, a time such as “1800 ms” can be determined. Details will be described later.

  In the format data, time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format type is stored. Specifically, in the format data, a light emission order and Q data corresponding to RGB values corresponding to the light emission order are defined in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the light emission of the LED 9 is controlled by Q data (color hexadecimal number, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal numbers. In the color hexadecimal number, each of RGB is represented by a total of six digits of hexadecimal numbers (0 to F), representing “16 × 16 = 256 gradations”. In this specification, two digits for each of RGB are represented. It is illustrated and explained as a notation in which the numerical value of is the same value and each of RGB is abbreviated to a total of three digits of one digit each. For simplicity, the notation of “0x” representing a hexadecimal number is omitted and illustrated.

  In addition, as Q data to be output to the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit constituting the light emitter driver 413 corresponding to the address, Q data for the group 1 and Q data for the group 2 are included in the Q data. Q data for group 3 is included. In each Q data corresponding to each group, RGB values output from the four output terminals Q included in the group are stored.

  Specifically, regarding the RGB values as output data, in group 1, Q0 corresponds to the R value (R), Q1 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q2 corresponds to the B value (B). Since Q3 is connected to the ground, it is not present (-). In group 2, Q4 corresponds to the R value (R), Q5 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q6 corresponds to the B value (B). Q7 is not (−) because it is connected to the ground. In group 3, Q8 corresponds to the R value (R), Q9 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q10 corresponds to the B value (B). Since Q11 is connected to the solenoid 500, it is assumed to be absent (-)

This will be specifically described.
The light emission control generation data shown at the top of FIG. 65 is data whose data name is “dat 1-1-a”.
The format type is "basic", and it is defined that the basic format shown in FIG. 8 (2) is applied.
The address is “08” and is determined to apply to the light emitter driver 413 b corresponding to the left frame LED 9 b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver 413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is "100 ms", and it is defined that the left frame LED 9b emits light in a unit light emission time of 100 ms.
The light emission control cycle is “100 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and the same time as the unit light emission time is set as a light emission control period in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color.

  In the format data, the order of “1” to “N” is defined as the light emission order. Further, “0, 0, F” is defined as Q data (RGB values) of each group for each of the light emission orders “1” to “N”. Since the R value and the G value of the Q data are set to “0” and the B value is set to “F” for all the light emission sequences, blue continuous light emission is realized.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing another example of the light emission control generation data.
The light emission control generation data is data whose data name is “dat 4-1-a”.
The format type is "basic", and it is defined that the basic format shown in FIG. 8 (2) is applied.
The address is “08” and is determined to apply to the light emitter driver 413 b corresponding to the left frame LED 9 b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is defined that data is repeatedly transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver 413 b in a cycle of 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is “40 ms”, and it is determined that the left frame LED 9b emits light with a unit light emission time of 40 ms.
The light emission control cycle is “120 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “switching”, and in order to perform rainbow light emission by switching (changing) three colors of red, green and blue, a time three times the unit light emission time of 40 ms is set as the light emission control cycle. It is fixed.

  In the format data, the order from “1” to “M” is determined as the light emission order. In the light emission order “1”, “F, 0, 0” is defined as Q data (RGB values) of each group, and in the light emission order “2”, “0, Q data (RGB values) of each group F, 0 "is determined, and" 0, 0, F "is determined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group in the light emission order" 3 ", and Q data of each group is determined in the light emission order" 4 " “F, 0, 0” is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, red light emission, green light emission and blue light emission are performed for each unit light emission time of 40 ms. As a result, the player can visually perceive that the light emission is iridescent.

FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing an example of the light emission pattern in this embodiment and the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 67 (1) shows an example in which the light emitting pattern A corresponds to the big hit reliability "low" and the LED 9 continuously emits light of single color blue. In this example, by setting the R value and the G value to “0” and the B value to “F”, continuous monochromatic blue light emission is realized. Δts in the figure is the data transmission cycle described above, and is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit light emission time described above, and is, for example, 100 ms. Here, the light emission type is illustrated as “continuous unit light emission time” in order to realize continuous light emission with “continuous”.

  FIG. 67 (2) shows an example in which the light emitting pattern B corresponds to the big hit reliability "middle" and the LED 9 continuously emits light of single color green. In this example, by setting the R value and the B value to “0” and the G value to “F”, continuous emission of monochromatic green is realized. Δts in the figure is the data transmission cycle described above, and is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit light emission time described above, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type “continuous”, it is illustrated as “continuous unit light emission time”.

  FIG. 67 (3) shows an example in which the light emitting pattern C corresponds to the big hit reliability "high" and the LED 9 continuously emits light of single color green. In this example, by setting the G value and the B value to “0” and the R value to “F”, continuous emission of single color red is realized. Δts in the figure is the data transmission cycle described above, and is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit light emission time described above, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type “continuous”, it is illustrated as “continuous unit light emission time”.

  FIG. 67 (4) shows an example in which the light emitting pattern D corresponds to the big hit reliability "highest" and causes the LED 9 to emit light in a rainbow color. In this example, the light emission of the rainbow color is made by changing each of the RGB values in order of “F” → “0” → “F” → “0”,. Is realized. Δts in the figure is the data transmission cycle described above, and is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δts in the figure is the unit light emission time described above, for example, 40 ms. Here, the light emission type is illustrated as "switching unit light emission time" in order to realize switching light emission with "switching".

  In the light emission patterns A to C, monochromatic blue, green, and red are continuously emitted, whereas in the light emission pattern D, rainbow colors are expressed by sequentially changing red → green → blue. Therefore, the continuous light emission time as a single color is shorter than the light emission patterns A to C. Also, even when focusing on the unit light emission time, the switching unit light emission time Δtn in the light emission pattern D is shorter than the continuous unit light emission time Δtm corresponding to the light emission patterns A to C.

  In the light emission pattern described above, for example, the light emission pattern A may not be blue but may be continuously emitted in white by setting the RGB values to the maximum values.

  Next, control data for achieving light emission by color mixing by gradation control of the LED will be described. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data described here can be applied as it is to the Q data of the format data included in the above light emission control generation data.

FIG. 68 illustrates an example of gradation control data that is control data for performing gradation control for realizing rainbow light emission.
In the gradation control data, the leftmost column shows the change of the luminescent color. The right column shows the switching unit light emission time Δtn / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows Q data (RGB values) corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,...) Expressed in hexadecimal, the rightmost column shows the light emission order. In this example, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the data transmission cycle Δts is 10 ms (Δtn = 40, Δts = 10).

  In the light emission order 01 to 03, white light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, F, F”. In the light emission order 04 to 09, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. In the light emission sequences 10 to 15, orange light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "F, A, 0".

  In the light emission order 16 to 21, yellow light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, F, 0”. In the light emission order 22 to 27, green light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, F, 0”. In the light emission order 28 to 33, light emission of light blue is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, F, F”.

  In the light emission order 34 to 39, blue light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, 0, F”. In the light emission order 40 to 45, purple light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “8, 0, 8”.

  The light emission order 01 to 45 can be configured as Q data for one cycle, for example. The time corresponding to this one cycle corresponds to the light emission control cycle described above. Here, the light emission control cycle is set to “1800 ms”. That is, the LED 9 is controlled to emit light sequentially in the emission color according to the emission order in a light emission control period of 1800 ms, with 01 to 45 as one set.

  As described above, by controlling the light emission colors to be emitted from the LED 9 in a short switching unit light emission time Δts so as to sequentially switch among a plurality of colors, it is as if human eyes are emitting rainbow light. It can be made visible.

FIG. 69 shows an example of gradation control data for realizing continuous red light emission.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows continuous unit light emission time Δtm / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows Q data corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,...). (RGB values) are expressed in hexadecimal, and the rightmost column shows the light emission order. In this example, the continuous unit light emission time Δtm is 100 ms, and the data transmission cycle Δts is 10 ms (Δtm = 100, Δts = 10).

  In the light emission order 01, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. The light emission in the light emission order 01 can be configured as Q data of the light emission control period, for example. Here, the light emission control cycle is set to “100 ms”. That is, the light emission of 01 may be controlled to emit light with a light emission control period of 100 ms.

FIG. 70 shows an example of gradation control data for realizing blinking of red.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows the switching unit light emission time Δtn / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows Q data corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,...). (RGB values) are expressed in hexadecimal, and the rightmost column shows the light emission order. In this example, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 50 ms, and the data transmission cycle Δts is 10 ms (Δtn = 50, Δts = 10).

  In the light emission order 01, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. In the light emission order 02, turning off is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, 0, 0”.

  The light emission order 01, 02 can be configured as Q data of the light emission control period. Here, the light emission control cycle is set to “100 ms”. That is, 01 and 02 may be set as one set, and the LEDs 9 may be controlled to emit light in the emission color according to the emission order in an emission control cycle of 100 ms.

  In the period corresponding to the light emission control period (1800 ms in FIG. 68, 100 ms in FIGS. 69 and 70) described in the above gradation control data, there is an effect of the variation period of the special symbol (special figure variation period). It does not necessarily correspond to the period (production period) being executed. That is, the light emission control period is a control period indicating one cycle of control data as a group shown in FIG. 68 to FIG. 70, and this is not related to the rendering period.

  Here, when the light emission effect (rainbow light emission effect at the time of big hit decision) is executed by changing the plurality of colors described above, the timing at which the period corresponding to the integral multiple of the light emission control period passes changes in the special symbol. There is no problem if it coincides with the timing of the end of the symbol, but if it is after the timing of the end of the variation of the special symbol, the light emission by the LED 9 is continued even after the variation of the special symbol is finished , A problem arises.

  As one of the methods for solving this, the CPU for effect control 120 generates light emission control data including the light emission stop command in the header (HD) at the timing when the variation of the special symbol ends, and the light emitter The data can be transmitted to the driver 413 (serial-parallel conversion circuit).

  In this case, in the serial-parallel change circuit, after receiving the light emission control data including the light emission stop command in the header (HD), the light emission control data transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 is converted from the serial signal in the decoder to parallel Stop conversion to signal. As a result, no data is output to the LED 9, and as a result, the light emission of the LED 9 is stopped.

  As another method, the production control CPU 120 transmits blank data (for example, data in which all Q values are set to “0”) to the light emitter driver 413 after the change of the special symbol is completed. Also good.

  In this case, the serial-to-parallel converter continuously converts the serial signal to the parallel signal, but since it is blank data, the LED 9 is completely turned off, and as a result, the light emission of the LED 9 is stopped.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the light emission effect process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the present embodiment.
First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a light emission effect execution condition that is a condition for executing the light emission effect is satisfied (A1). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main substrate 11.

  If it is determined that the condition is satisfied (A1; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a light emission pattern (A3). Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the received fluctuation pattern command, the light emission pattern is selected and determined from the light emission pattern table 1211 by the method described above using the light emission effect distribution table 1212.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the light emission effect start timing (A5). Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display of the effect pattern reaches a prescribed time predetermined as the time from the start of fluctuation to the occurrence of the reach state for the fluctuation pattern, the light emission effect Determined as the start timing.

  If it is determined that it is the light emission effect start timing (A5; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the data transmission timing (A7). The data transmission timing is a timing each time when the time corresponding to the above-described data transmission cycle elapses.

  If it is determined that it is the data transmission timing (A7; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of loop A for each electrical component (LED 9) (A9 to A21).

  In the process of loop A, the effect control CPU 120 executes, for the electric component, a light emission control data generation process of generating light emission control data (A11). Specifically, with reference to the light emission control data 1213, the light emission control generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern determined in A3 is read out. Then, using the read light emission control generation data, light emission control data in a format (basic format or extended format) corresponding to the common format and format type shown in FIG. 8 is generated for the electric component.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a light emission control data transmission process of transmitting the light emission control data generated in A9 to each light emitter control board 16 (A13).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the light emission control data transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 is a serial-parallel conversion circuit that first configures the light emitter driver 413b of the light emitter control board 16D via the effect control relay board 16A. Input to the data input terminal (DATA / I) of The input light emission control data is transmitted from the data through terminal (DATA / O) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit to the data input terminal (DATA / I) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit constituting the light emitter driver 413a of the light emitter control board 16E. Is input to). The input light emission control data is input from the data through terminal (DATA / O) of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit to the data input terminal (DATA / I) of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light emitter driver 413c of the light emitter control board 16F. Is input to).

  In the serial-parallel conversion circuit constituting each light emitter driver 413 (413a, 413b, 413c), address information (AD1 to AD5 in 12 channels) included in the common format of the input light emission control data is input as a decode address. It is determined whether the address information set from the terminal (12 channels: AD0 to AD5) matches or not, and only if the address information matches, the input serial clock signal and light emission control data are converted to parallel signals. Converted. That is, only the light emission control data in which the address information included in the input light emission control data matches the address information set from the decode address input terminals (AD0 to AD5 for 12 channels) is paralleled in the corresponding light emitter driver 413 Since the light emission control data is converted into a signal, the light emission control data for the light emitter driver 413 having different addresses is passed as it is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 increments the group number (group No) by “1” (A15). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the above processing is completed for all the groups corresponding to the electrical component (A17), and if it is determined that the processing is not completed (A17; No), A9. Return the process to If it is determined that the process is completed (A17; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 resets the group No to “0” (A19). Then, the effect control CPU 120 transfers the process to the next electric component (LED 9).

  If processing of loop A is executed for all the electric parts (LEDs 9) (A21), the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the light emission effect (A23). If it is determined that it is not the end timing (A23; No), the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to A7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the light emission effect (A23; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process is ended (A25). If it is determined that the process is to be continued (A25; No), the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to A1. On the other hand, when it is determined that the process is to be ended (A25; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the light emission effect process.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a light emission effect using the LED 9. The effect control CPU 120 produces a light emission effect by a first pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light in a specific color such as blue, green, and red, and a second pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light in a plurality of colors (blue, green, red, and the like). It is feasible. And big hit reliability differs in the 1st pattern and the 2nd pattern, and a luminescence production period differs.
According to this, by making the big hit reliability different between the first pattern and the second pattern and making the light emission production period different, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect of the light emission production and to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the light emission effect by a plurality of light emission patterns different in at least part of light emission modes (for example, light emission colors), and the plurality of light emission patterns are all specified such as blue, green, red It is a light emission aspect including light emission of color, and in these plural light emission patterns, the big hit reliability differs, and the light emission unit time for a specific color differs.
According to this, it becomes possible to pay attention to the difference in the period during which the specific color is emitted, so that the effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

Third Embodiment
Next, an embodiment will be described in which a light emission pattern for causing the LED 9 to blink in a specific color is applied as the light emission pattern. In the present embodiment, the LED 9 is caused to emit light by a plurality of light emission patterns based on a light emission mode in which a specific color is blinked, the big hit reliability is varied by the plurality of light emission patterns, and the light emission period of the specific color (hereinafter referred to as “light emission”). It is characterized in that the cycle is different.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of the light emission pattern table 1211 in the third embodiment.
The table configuration of the light emission pattern table 1211 is the same as that of the light emission pattern table 1211 described with reference to FIG. 62, but the contents are different.

  In the light emission pattern table, for each category, the light emission pattern includes the light emission pattern in which the light emission type is “flashing” and the light emission color is “red”. That is, a light emission pattern for causing the LED 9 to emit red blinking light is determined. In addition, the red blinking light emission patterns are determined in accordance with the big hit reliability. The present embodiment is characterized in that the unit light emission time of the red blinking light emission pattern is changed according to the big hit reliability.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a data configuration of emission control generation data in this case.
The data structure of the light emission control generation data is the same as that of the light emission control generation data described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, but the contents of the data are different.

Specifically, the light emission control generation data shown in FIG. 73 is data whose data name is "dat 11-1-a".
The format type is "basic", and it is defined that the basic format shown in FIG. 8 (2) is applied.
The address is “08” and is determined to apply to the light emitter driver 413 b corresponding to the left frame LED 9 b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver 413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is “100 ms”, and it is determined that the left frame LED 9b emits light with a unit light emission time of 200 ms.
The light emission control period is “200 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “flashing”, and in order to cause red light to be turned on / off, a time twice as long as the unit light emission time of 10 ms is set as the light emission control cycle.

  In the format data, the order of “1” to “P” is determined as the light emission order. In the light emission order “1”, “F, 0, 0” is defined as Q data (RGB values) of each group, and in the light emission order “2”, “0, Q data (RGB values) of each group “0, 0” is determined, “F, 0, 0” is determined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group in the light emission order “3”, and Q data of each group is determined in the light emission order “4” “0, 0, 0” is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, the red light is turned on / off every unit light emission time of 50 ms. As a result, red flashing is realized.

FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing an example of the light emission pattern in this embodiment and the time variation of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 74 (1) shows an example in which the light emitting pattern E corresponds to the big hit reliability "low" and blinks the LED 9 in red. In this example, by switching the red lighting with the R value “F”, the G value and the B value “0”, and the red lighting with the RGB values “0” respectively, by the blinking unit light emission time Δt 1. Realizes flashing red.

  FIG. 74 (2) shows an example in which the light emitting pattern F corresponds to the big hit reliability "middle" and blinks the LED 9 in red. In this example, by switching the red lighting with the R value “F”, the G value and the B value “0”, and the red lighting with each RGB value “0” by switching by the blinking unit light emission time Δt 2. Realizes flashing red. Here, the blinking unit light emission time Δto2 can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δt01 in FIG. 74 (1) (Δt02 <Δt1).

  FIG. 74 (3) shows an example in which the light emitting pattern G corresponds to the big hit reliability "high" and blinks the LED 9 in red. In this example, by switching the red lighting with the R value “F”, the G value and the B value “0”, and the red lighting with the RGB values “0” respectively, by switching the flashing unit light emission time Δt 3 by 3 times. , Has achieved a red blink. Here, the blinking unit light emission time Δto3 can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δt02 in FIG. 74 (2) (Δt03 <Δt02).

In FIG. 74 (4), the light emission pattern H corresponds to the “highest hit” reliability,
The example which makes LEP9 emit light in a rainbow color is shown. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in the order of “F” → “0” → “F” → “0” →. Light emission is realized. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn can be determined to be a time shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δtо3 of FIG. 74 (3) (Δtn <Δtо3).

  The light emission patterns E, F, and G described above are light emission patterns that cause the LED 9 to emit light in a light emission mode in which red is blinked, and these light emission patterns correspond to a first specific pattern. In addition, the light emission pattern H is a light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light according to a light emission mode in which the color is changed from red to red among a plurality of colors (red, green and blue). This light emission pattern corresponds to the second specific pattern To do.

  In the light emission patterns E, F, and G (first specific pattern) and the light emission pattern H (second specific pattern), the big hit reliability is different, and the red light emission cycle is controlled to be different. Specifically, the light emission pattern H having the highest hit probability is controlled such that the red light emission period is the shortest.

  Also in the same first specific pattern, light emission patterns E, F, and G, the big hit reliability is different, and the red light emission cycle is controlled to be different. Specifically, the light emission pattern G having the highest hit probability is controlled so that the red light emission period, that is, the red blink period becomes the shortest.

  In the above example, since the blinking and lighting of red are switched by the blinking unit light emission time Δt0, “2 × Δto” that is twice the blinking unit light emission time Δto is the red light emission cycle.

  In addition, although red was mentioned as an example and demonstrated as a specific color which blinks LED9 here, it is good also as other colors, such as blue and green. In addition, the lighting and blinking times do not necessarily have to be the same, and either one may be longer than the other.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 uses any one of a first specific pattern for causing the LED 9 to emit light in a light emission mode in which specific colors such as blue, green, and red are blinked, and a plurality of colors including the specific color. It is possible to execute a light emission effect by the second specific pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light according to the light emission mode in which the color is changed to another color, and the big hit reliability differs between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern. The light emission cycle is different.
According to this, by making the big hit reliability different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern and making the light emission cycle of the specific color different, it becomes possible to focus on the difference in the light emission cycle of the specific color. , It is possible to enhance the effects of light emission effects and improve the game interest.

  Regarding the light emission effect by the light emission pattern described in the third embodiment, the second embodiment is applied to the principle of the light emission effect including the timing of starting / terminating the light emission effect, the data configuration for realizing the light emission effect, and the control method. A method similar to that of the form can be applied.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, an embodiment will be described in which a light emission pattern having a common aspect of change in color including a specific color is applied as the light emission pattern. The present embodiment is characterized in that the LED 9 is caused to emit light by a common pattern in which the aspect of color change is common, and the big hit reliability is made different among a plurality of common patterns, and the light emission period of a specific color is made different.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a data configuration of emission control generation data in this case.
The data structure of the light emission control generation data is the same as that of the light emission control generation data described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, but the contents of the data are different.

Specifically, the light emission control generation data shown in FIG. 75 is data whose data name is "dat 21-1-a".
The format type is "basic", and it is defined that the basic format shown in FIG. 8 (2) is applied.
The address is “08” and is determined to apply to the light emitter driver 413 b corresponding to the left frame LED 9 b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver 413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is “100 ms”, and it is determined that the left frame LED 9b emits light with a unit light emission time of 200 ms.
The light emission control period is “200 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “switching”, and in order to perform light emission by switching (change) between white and blue, a time twice as long as the unit light emission time of 100 ms is set as the light emission control cycle.

  In the format data, the order of “1” to “P” is determined as the light emission order. For the light emission order "1", "F, F, F" are defined as Q data (RGB values) of each group, and for the light emission order "2", "0, Q data (RGB values) of each group “0, F” is defined, “F, F, F” is defined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group in the light emission order “3”, and the Q data of each group is determined in the light emission order “4” “0, 0, F” is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. Thus, white light emission and blue light emission are performed for each unit light emission time of 50 ms. As a result, white-blue light emission is realized.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart showing an example of light emission patterns in the present embodiment and time change of RGB values corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 76 (1) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits light in white and blue corresponding to the big hit reliability "low" as the light emission pattern S. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. White and blue switching light emission are realized by switching the switching unit light emission time Δtn1 at a time.

  FIG. 76 (2) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits light in white and blue corresponding to the big hit reliability "middle" as the light emission pattern T. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. White and blue switching light emission is realized by switching the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 each. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 can be defined to be a time shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn1 of FIG. 76 (1) (Δtn2 <Δtn1)

  FIG. 76 (3) shows an example in which the light emitting pattern U corresponds to the big hit reliability "high" and causes the LED 9 to emit light in white and blue. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. White and blue switching light emission is realized by switching the switching unit light emission time Δtn3 each). Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn3 can be determined to be a time shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 of FIG. 76 (2) (Δtn3 <Δtn2).

  FIG. 76 (4) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits light in white and blue corresponding to the big hit reliability "highest" as the light emission pattern V. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. White and blue switching light emission is realized by switching the switching unit light emission time Δtn4 each). Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn4 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn3 of FIG. 76 (3) (Δtn4 <Δtn3).

  The light emission patterns S, T, U, and V described above realize light emission patterns in which the modes of color change are common by switching the light emission of white and blue. In addition, the switching unit light emission time of white and blue is controlled to be shorter as the big hit reliability is higher. In addition, since the light emission patterns S, T, U, and V are light emission patterns in which a plurality of colors are changed, the light emission patterns S, T, U, and V correspond to the second pattern and a common pattern in which the color change mode is common.

  Although white and blue switching light emission has been described above as an example, white and green switching light emission and white and red switching light emission may be realized in the same manner.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the light emission effect by the second pattern according to a plurality of common patterns having a common aspect of color change, and the plurality of common patterns have different big hit reliability and are common The light emission periods of the colors are different.
According to this, it is possible to focus attention on the difference in the light emission period of the common color by making the light emission period of the common color different in the big hit reliability in a plurality of common patterns, and enhance the effect effect of the light emission effect. , The game interest can be improved.

  Regarding the light emission effect by the light emission pattern described in the fourth embodiment, the second embodiment will be applied to the principle of the light emission effect including the timing to start / end the light emission effect, the data configuration for realizing the light emission effect, and the control method. A method similar to that of the form can be applied.

[5. Other embodiments]
The embodiment to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. In addition, about the structure same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

[5-1. Gaming machine]
Although the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, a slot machine which allows a player to play a game using a game medal is the gaming machine according to the present invention. A light emission effect similar to that of the embodiment may be performed.

[5-2. Light emitting part]
In the above embodiment, the light emitting unit according to the present invention has been described as three types of the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c. However, it goes without saying that, for example, the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e may be used as the light emitting unit according to the present invention, for example.

  In addition, for example, a movable member (production effect) for production is configured to be operated by driving a solenoid, and an LED is formed on this production feature and the accessory LED is used as the light emitting unit according to the present invention. Also good.

  Further, for example, LED light is irradiated from the side surface of a laser-processed acrylic plate and the like, and a light guide plate such as an LED light guide plate configured as an acrylic plate that emits surface light by a special pulse mark, or a 7-segment display method is used for display. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a light-emitting unit, such as a seg display that can be displayed, a dot display that can perform display by a dot display method, and the light-emitting unit is used as a light-emitting unit according to the present invention. A light emission effect may be executed.

[5-3. Flash pattern]
In the above embodiment, the light emission pattern in which the light emitting unit emits light with the specific color as a single color has been described as an example as the first pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting unit may emit light by using a light emission pattern that continuously emits a mixed color (such as a color obtained by mixing RGB at a predetermined ratio) as a specific color.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, as the first specific pattern, the light emission pattern for causing the LED 9 to emit light in the light emission mode in which the specific color is blinked as a single color is described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting unit may be caused to emit light by using a light emission pattern that blinks a mixed color (such as a color in which RGB is mixed at a predetermined ratio) as a specific color as the first specific pattern.

  Further, the following light emission pattern may be determined as the light emission pattern.

  FIG. 77 is a timing chart showing an example of a light emission pattern and a temporal change in RGB values corresponding to each light emission pattern in another embodiment.

  FIG. 77 (1) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and blue light corresponding to the big hit reliability “low” as the light emission pattern W. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. ) Is switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn5, thereby realizing white-blue switching light emission.

  FIG. 77 (2) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and green light corresponding to the big hit reliability “medium” as the light emission pattern X. In this example, the first light emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second light emission (green) with the G value set to “F” and the R and B values set to “0”. ) Is switched in units of switching unit light emission time Δtn6, thereby realizing white-green switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn6 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn5 of FIG. 77 (1) (Δtn6 <Δtn5).

  FIG. 77 (3) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and red light as the light emission pattern Y, corresponding to the big hit reliability “high”. In this example, the first light emission (white) with the R, G, and B values being “F” and the second light emission (red) with the R value being “F” and the G and B values being “0”. ) Is switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn7 step by step, thereby realizing white-red switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn7 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn6 in FIG. 77 (2) (Δtn7 <Δtn6).

  FIG. 77 (4) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits light in rainbow colors corresponding to the big hit reliability “highest” as the light emission pattern Z. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in the order of “F” → “0” → “F” → “0” →. Realizes light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn8 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn7 in FIG. 77 (3) (Δtn8 <Δtn7).

[5-4. Flash control]
Although the above embodiment has been described as controlling the light emission of the LED 9 based on RGB values expressed in hexadecimal numbers, this is merely an example, and for example, decimal numbers (256 gradations: 0 to 255) The light emission of the LED 9 may be controlled based on the RGB values represented by

  Further, for example, data for emission control is configured by modeling based on HSV (hue, saturation, lightness) color space, and even if the LED 9 is made to emit light using the data for emission control, the emission effect is realized. Good.

  In addition, a light emitting area as a light emitting unit is configured for each light emitting element having RGB as one set or a plurality of light emitting elements having RGB as one set so that each light emitting area emits light with a different light emitting color. It may be. For example, a light emitting region composed of a plurality of light emitting elements may be configured, and each light emitting region may emit light in different colors to form a gradation, thereby realizing rainbow light emission.

[5-5. Lighting production time]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the light emission effect time is determined for each light emission pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol. However, instead of doing this, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the light emission effect time each time according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main substrate 11, and the decision is made The light emission control of the LED 9 may be performed in the light emission presentation time.

[5-6. Specific color]
In the above embodiment, the specific color is described as a single color such as blue, green, red, etc. However, the specific color is not limited to these, and a color mixture generated by mixing these single colors is specified as a specific color according to the present invention It is also good.

  In general, “monochromatic” means a color that is not mixed with only one color. In this case, in terms of RGB, it is conceivable that only one component has a value and the other component has no value (0) and is defined as a single color. However, the color that the player visually recognizes as a single color, that is, the color that the player visually recognizes as a single color may be handled as a single color to control light emission.

  Specifically, in the case of “blue”, for example, with 256 gradations, the B value is set to “255”, and the R value and the G value are set to very small values of “1 to 9”. It is considered that the player visually recognizes "blue". The same applies to "green" and "red". Therefore, for example, a light emission pattern having a maximum value for a component corresponding to a color that is a main element of a single color among RGB values and a minute value for the other two components is determined as a single color light emission pattern. You may do it. In other words, even if the colors are actually mixed, the present invention may be applied by regarding the color that is recognized as a single color by the player as a single color.

  In addition, it is sufficient to cause the LED 9 to emit light so as to be recognized as a specific color by the player, and it is a design matter what kind of light emission control method is applied to cause the LED 9 to emit light. It is not limited to the control method using the serial-parallel conversion circuit explained in the above.

[5-7. Hold display related]
In said embodiment, CPU120 for presentation control is in the display mode (a display color, lighting / flashing, etc.) of the hold display displayed on hold display 25 (1st hold display 25A or 2nd hold display 25B). A light emission effect may be performed to cause the LED 9 to emit light according to the corresponding light emission pattern.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the on-hold display advance notice effect determination process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in this case.
First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start winning combination determination result specification command has been received from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15 (B1).

  At the game control microcomputer 100 side, at the time of start winning, the display determination (whether or not a big hit) and the variation pattern type of winning determination (prefetching determination) is performed, and a command (display result specification command) indicating the winning determination result The variation pattern type designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as a start winning determination result command.

  Here, the fluctuation pattern types include the types of fluctuation patterns such as “non reach out”, “normal reach out”, “super reach out”, “normal reach big hit”, and “super reach big hit”. In B <b> 1, it is determined whether or not the start winning determination result command is received from the main board 11.

  If it is determined that it has been received (B1; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the hold display from the prefetch mode determination table 1219 stored in the ROM 121 based on the received start winning time determination result specification command. Determine (B3). The effect control CPU 120 controls the hold indicator 25 to perform hold display in the display mode determined in B3.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the light emission mode of the LED 9 based on the display mode of the hold display determined in B3 (B5). The effect control CPU 120 controls each LED 9 to emit light with a light emission pattern corresponding to the determined light emission mode. Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold display notice effect determination process.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of the prefetching mode determination table 1219. As shown in FIG.
In the pre-reading mode determination table, for example, a variation pattern type and a hold display are defined in association with each other.

In the variation pattern type, the type of variation pattern of the special symbol is defined.
In the hold display, a hold display mode such as “lighting” and “blinking”, a display color of the hold display such as normal color, blue, green, and red, or a combination thereof is defined as a display mode of the hold display. . Further, in the hold display, a selection ratio for selecting the display mode of the hold display is defined.

This will be specifically described.
In the prefetch mode determination table 1219 shown in FIG. 79, “non reach out”, “normal reach out”, “super reach out”, “normal reach out”, and “super reach out” are defined as fluctuation pattern types. In the hold display, “normally lit”, “blue light”, “red light”, and “red blink” are defined as display modes of the hold display.

  For the variation pattern type "non-reach out", as a selection rate, "normal lighting" is "75%", "blue lighting" is "25%", "red lighting" and "red blinking" are "on hold display" 0% is defined respectively.

  For the variation pattern type "Normal reach out", as a selection ratio, "60%" for "Normal light", "20%" for "Blue light", "15%" for "Red light", "Red" as a selection rate For "flashing", "5%" is defined respectively.

  For the variation pattern type “Super reach out”, “20%” for “normal light”, “25%” for “blue light”, “25%” for “red light”, “25%” as a selection ratio for the hold display "30%" is defined for "flashing red".

  For the variation pattern type "Normal reach big hit", "10%" for "Normal lighting", "20%" for "Blue lighting", "30%" for "Red lighting", "Red" as a selection ratio for the hold display For "flashing", "40%" is defined respectively.

  For the variation pattern type “Super reach big hit”, “2%” for “normal lighting”, “8%” for “blue lighting”, “40%” for “red lighting”, and “40%” for “Hold on” as a selection rate "50%" is defined for "flashing red".

  The effect control CPU 120 selects and determines the display mode of one hold display according to the selection ratio according to the variation pattern type. In this case, when it is determined to be “normally lit”, a white-lighted hold display is performed, and the LED 9 is caused to emit light with a white-lighted emission pattern corresponding to this white-lighted state.

  When “blue lighting” is determined, the blue lighting on-hold display is performed, and the LED 9 is caused to emit light in a blue lighting emission pattern corresponding to the blue lighting. When it is determined to be “red lighting”, the red lighting on-hold display is performed, and the LED 9 is caused to emit light with a red lighting emission pattern corresponding to the red lighting. In addition, when “red flashing” is determined, the red flashing hold display is performed, and the LED 9 is caused to emit light with the red flashing light emission pattern corresponding to the red flashing.

  As described above, by executing the light emission effect with the light emission pattern according to the display mode of the hold display (specific display) corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the game entertainment.

  Here, the specific display corresponding to the variable display is the hold display as the display corresponding to the variable display on which the execution is suspended, but the active display as the display corresponding to the variable display being executed is the specific display. The light emission effect may be executed by a light emission pattern corresponding to the display mode of the specific display. That is, the specific display according to the present invention can be a variable display compatible display including a hold display and an active display.

[5-8. Lighting production start / end timing]
It is needless to say that the light emission effect start timing and the light emission effect end timing described in the above embodiments are merely examples, and design changes can be made as appropriate.

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the principle of another light emission effect.
FIG. 80 (1) shows a first example of the light-emitting effect.
In this figure, a timing chart showing a control example of light emission effect in a specific super reach effect is shown, and a control example of light emission effect in battle reach effect is shown.

  When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect pattern is displayed in the normal change display mode as shown in FIG. 72A from the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) until the reach state occurs. Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

  In the effect display device 5, when a reach state occurs at time “tm1”, a message image 53 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C, and a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect, etc. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, in response to the occurrence of the reach state, the effect control CPU 120 starts the execution of the light emission effect. That is, the start (start timing) of the light emission effect is the timing (time “tm1”) when the reach state occurs.

FIG. 80 (A) shows an example in which the big hit reliability is lower than in the cases of FIGS. 80 (B) and (C), and the fluctuation display result is "lost".
In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time “ts1” when the battle reach first half effect is ended is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts1”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts1”. Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light with the light emission color A. The light emission color A in this case may be a light emission color (for example, white or blue) which is a single color light emission color indicating that the big hit reliability is low.

FIG. 80B shows an example in which the big hit reliability is higher than that in FIG. 80A, but lower than that in FIG. 80C, and the variation display result is “lost”. Yes.
In this example, the time “tm1” at which the reach state occurs is set as the light emission effect start timing, and an example of the light emission effect including the two effect stages of the first effect stage and the subsequent second effect stage is shown. In this example, the first effect stage ends at time “ts1” when the battle reach first half effect ends, and the second effect stage ends at time “ts2” when the battle reach second-half effect performed subsequently developed ends To do. That is, for the entire light emission effect, the light emission effect start timing is time “tm1”, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts2”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts2”.

  In addition, as the first effect stage, the effect start timing is time “tm1”, the effect end timing is “ts1”, and the effect period of the first effect stage is a period from time “tm1” to “ts1” . Further, as the second effect stage, the effect start timing is “ts1”, the effect end timing is “ts2”, and the effect period of the second effect stage is a period from time “ts1” to “ts2”.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light of the luminescent color A in the first effect stage, and controls the LED 9 to emit light of the luminescent color B in the second effect stage. The light emission color A in this case is a light emission color of a single color and may be a light emission color (for example, white or blue) indicating that the big hit reliability is low, and the light emission color B is a light emission color of a single color The emission color (for example, green) indicating that the big hit reliability is medium may be used.

FIG. 80C shows an example in which the big hit reliability is the highest and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”.
In this example, the time “tm1” at which the reach state occurs is set as the light emission effect start timing, and an example of the light emission effect including the two effect stages of the first effect stage and the subsequent second effect stage is shown. In this example, the first effect stage ends at time “ts1” at which the battle reach first half effect ends, and after the battle reach second half effect which is progressively executed thereafter, the reach result effect and the stop symbol effect are executed, and the final The second effect stage ends at time “ts3” at which the variable display ends. That is, for the entire light emission effect, the light emission effect start timing is time “tm1”, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts3”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts3”.

  Further, as the first effect stage, the effect start timing is time “tm1”, the effect end timing is “ts1”, and the effect period of the first effect stage is a period from time “tm1” to “ts1”. Further, as the second effect stage, the effect start timing is “ts1”, the effect end timing is “ts3”, and the effect period of the second effect stage is a period from time “ts1” to “ts3”.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light in the emission color C in the first effect stage, and controls the LED 9 to emit light in the special emission color in the second effect stage. The light emission color C in this case is a light emission color of a single color, and may be a light emission color (for example, red) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, and the special light emitting color indicates that the big hit reliability is the highest. A luminescent color (for example, rainbow color) may be used.

In the above example, after the second effect stage, the light emission effect of causing the LED 9 to emit light in the special emission color may be executed. For example, in the first production stage, the LED 9 is caused to emit light with the light emission color A or the like (first specific color), and in the subsequent second production stage, the LED 9 is produced with the light emission colors B, C or the like (second specific color). , And after the period corresponding to the second effect stage ends, a light effect that causes the LED 9 to emit light in the special light emission color may be executed. In addition, the light emission pattern (light emission pattern to blink in a specific color) exemplified in the third embodiment, and the light emission pattern exemplified in the fourth embodiment (light emission pattern having a common mode of change in color including a specific color) are applied. May be. For example, in the first effect stage, the LED 9 is caused to emit light in the light emission mode in which the light emitting color A etc. (first specific color) blinks, and in the second effect stage thereafter, the light emitting colors B, C etc. (second specific The LED 9 may be caused to emit light in a light emission mode in which the color) is blinked, and after the period corresponding to the second effect stage has ended, a light emission effect may be performed in which the LED 9 emits light in a special light emission color. The combination of light emission color and light emission mode can be any combination.
In this way, by executing a plurality of stages of light emission effects with different colors and modes for causing the light emitting unit to emit light, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effects and improve the game entertainment. Further, after the period corresponding to the first effect stage and the second effect stage is over, the player can have a special sense of expectation by executing the light emission effect by the light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light with the special light emission color. it can.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, although the timing which the reach state generate | occur | produced was made into the light emission production start timing, this is only an example to the last, and it is good also as a specific timing after the reach state generate | occur | produces as a light emission production start timing. For example, the timing at which a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the reach state has occurred may be set as the light emission effect start timing.

  Further, in each of the light emission patterns shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 80 described above, although the light emission effect start timing (time “tm 1”) is illustrated and described as a common timing, the light emission effect start timings for all light emission patterns are not necessarily required. It does not have to be common.

  Specifically, the light emission effect start timing may be changed according to the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation pattern type, or the light emission effect start timing may be changed according to the type of effect to be executed or the type of reach. May be.

  In this case, the light emission effect start timing may be set so that the light emission effect is started at a later timing in time as the jackpot reliability becomes higher as a result. On the contrary, the light emission effect start timing may be set so that the light emission effect is started at an earlier timing as the jackpot reliability is higher as a result.

  Further, with regard to the light emission effect end timing (time “tn” in FIG. 61, “ts” in FIG. 80), it is needless to say that the above embodiment is merely an example and can be appropriately changed. . As described above, even when the light emission effect start timing is common or different, as the result is the case where the big hit reliability is higher, the light emission effect is ended at a later timing. It is preferable to set the light emission effect end timing and the light emission effect time in advance.

[5-9. Lighting effect based on player's movement]
During the execution of the reach effect in the above-described embodiment, the light emission effect may be performed based on a predetermined action of the player.

  Specifically, for example, when the player presses the push button 31B after execution of the reach effect, and the push sensor 35B detects that the push button 31B is pressed, a detection signal is output from the push sensor 35B. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 may start executing the light emission effect.

  Further, in this case, the number of times the player pressed the push button 31B, that is, the push sensor 35 detects the pressing of the push button 31B, internally counts the number of times the detection signal is output. When the number of times reaches the specified number, the emission color of the LED 9 may be changed (for example, blue → green → red → rainbow).

  In addition to the above, for example, the player performs tilting operation of the stick controller 31A, the controller sensor unit 35B detects tilting operation of the stick controller 31A, and the production control is triggered by the detection signal being output. The CPU 120 may execute the light emission effect.

  In this case, the emission color of the LED 9 may be changed according to the tilt angle of the stick controller 31A. In this case, the light emission color is defined for each numerical range corresponding to the tilt angle of the stick controller 31A, and the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the numerical range including the tilt angle detected by the controller sensor unit 35B. The LED 9 may be made to emit light based on the emission color.

  Further, since the stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button at a predetermined position of the operating rod held by the player, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the light emission effect when the pressing operation of the trigger button is detected. You may do it.

  In addition, for the button operation and the stick operation in the above-mentioned case, for example, as a hidden element (hidden operation: hidden button) related to the execution of the light emission effect, the game entertaining is performed by not performing notification notifying the execution of the operation. Can be improved.

  However, it does not necessarily have to be a hidden element, and a message prompting a button operation or a stick operation or an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 5 to allow the player to perform the button operation or the stick operation. Also good.

  As described above, during the execution of the reach effect, by executing the light emission effect based on the predetermined action of the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the game entertainment.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 may output a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 8 during execution of the light emission effect in response to the button operation or stick operation by the player.

  Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 8 every time the number of times the button is pressed reaches a specified number (for example, 10 times) or whenever the tilt angle of the stick reaches a specified angle. Also good.

  In this case, depending on the number of times the button is pressed or the tilt angle of the stick, the specific color in continuous light emission is changed (for example, blue → green → red → iridescent) or the specific color in blinking light turns on / off ( For example, it is sufficient to change blue lighting → blue off) or change a specific color in switching light emission (for example, white → blue, blue → white).

[5-10. Light emission for each light emission site]
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured with a light-emitting unit configured with a plurality of light-emitting portions, and a light-emitting effect in which the plurality of light-emitting portions emit light in different colors may be executed.

  Specifically, for example, a light-emitting unit having a hat shape, a stick shape, an arch shape, or the like, which includes a light-emitting body including a plurality of light-emitting portions such as LEDs, and gradation of the LEDs of the plurality of light-emitting portions. It may be changed to realize the light emission effect by the rainbow-colored light emission pattern described in the above embodiment.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a temporal change in the color of the light emitting part in this case. Here, a case is illustrated in which the luminous effect is realized by controlling the luminous body composed of the three luminous sites of the first luminous site, the second luminous site and the third luminous site.

  For example, the light emission color of the first light emitting portion is changed in order such as “white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white →. In this case, based on the emission color of the first light emitting part, for example, the color is shifted by one, and the emission color of the second light emitting part is changed to “red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white → red → ・.. ", for example, by shifting the color by two and changing the light emission color of the third light emitting part in the order of" Orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white → red → orange → ... ” Change with.

  As described above, by performing the light-emitting effect with the special pattern that causes the plurality of light-emitting portions constituting the light-emitting unit to emit light in different colors, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light-emitting effect and to improve the game interest.

[5-11. Pre-read notice effect]
The CPU 120 for effect control may execute the preview advance notice effect, and may execute the light emission effect corresponding to the execution of the advance notice effect.

  Specifically, a pre-reading notice determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the prefetching notice pattern. The pre-read notice determination table is compared with a random number value for pre-read notice type determination in accordance with the designated content of the change category command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the start winning corresponding to the change display to be notice. The numerical value (decision value) may be assigned to the determination result of “no execution” corresponding to the case where the advance preview notice effect is not performed, a plurality of advance notice patterns before the advance preview effect is performed, and the like.

  In this case, for example, a plurality of light emission patterns are determined in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment in association with the prefetch notice pattern. Then, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetch notice determination table on the basis of the numerical data indicating the random number value for prefetch notice determination extracted from the random number circuit 124 etc., and indicates presence / absence of prefetch notice effect and prefetch notice pattern. decide. Then, the light emission pattern corresponding to the determined prefetch notice pattern may be selected to execute the light emission effect described in the above embodiment.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5 effect display device 100 microcomputer for game control 102 RAM
120 CPU for production control
321 Movable member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a light emitting unit,
It further comprises a light emission effect means capable of executing a light emission effect using the light emitting unit,
The light emission effecting unit changes a first specific pattern for causing the light emitting unit to emit light by a light emission mode in which a specific color is blinked, and a light emission mode for changing from one of a plurality of colors including the specific color to another color. The light emission effect can be performed by the second specific pattern that causes the light emitting unit to emit light by
The first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations for the player, and the light emission period of the specific color is different.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images